KM-1510, KM-1810 Parts, Service Manual

KM-1510/1810
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in July 01
2A170762
Revision 2
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER DEXPLOSION SIL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.
REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MME TYPE OU DUN TYPE RECOMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RBUT LES BATTERIES USAGES
CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................
Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. .............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....
Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................
Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........
Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................
Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may
cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................
Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is
accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention
immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ..............................................................................................................................
Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers
instruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING
Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............
Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .........................................................................................................................................
Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

mechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................
Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related
brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other
serious accident. ...............................................................................................................................
When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................
Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............
Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If
it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................
Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause
electric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................
CAUTION
Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................
Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......
Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................
Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................
Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................
Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................
Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................
Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. .......
Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................
After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten
connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................
Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the
instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................
Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................
Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main
switch on.
Always wash hands afterwards.
Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................
Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet
immediately. ......................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than
the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................
2A1/2
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
1-1-2 Parts names .........................................................................................................................................
(1) Copier .............................................................................................................................................
(2) Operation panel ..............................................................................................................................
1-1-3 Machine cross section ..........................................................................................................................
1-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................
(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor drive train) ..........................................................................................
(2) Drive system 2 (scanner motor drive train) .....................................................................................
(3) Drive system 3 (original feed motor (18 cpm copier only) drive train) ............................................
(4) Drive system 4 (ST feed motor (optional) drive train) .....................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-3
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-5
1-1-6
1-1-6
1-1-7
1-1-8
1-1-8
1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Developer and toner ............................................................................................................................. 1-2-1
1-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-2
1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................. 1-3-11
1-3-3 Copier management ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-12
(1) Executing a copier management item .......................................................................................... 1-3-12
(2) Default settings ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-13
1-3-4 Installing the optional drawer ............................................................................................................. 1-3-16
1-3-5 Installing the printer board/network board (option) ............................................................................. 1-3-18
1-3-6 Installing the memory board (standard for 18 cpm/optional for 15 cpm) ............................................ 1-3-21
1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-4-1 Maintenance mode ...............................................................................................................................
(1) Executing a maintenance item .......................................................................................................
(2) Maintenance mode item list ............................................................................................................
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ............................................................................................
1-4-1
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-5
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-2
(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-6
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-10
(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-10
(2) Self-diagnostic codes ................................................................................................................... 1-5-10
1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-15
(1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-16
(2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-16
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-17
(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-17
(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-17
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ..............................................................................................
1-5-18
1-1-1
(7) A black line appears laterally. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-18
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................................................................... 1-5-18
(9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................................. 1-5-19
(10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................................................................... 1-5-19
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-19
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-20
2A1/2
(13) Paper creases. .............................................................................................................................
(14) Offset occurs. ...............................................................................................................................
(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................
(16) Fixing is poor. ...............................................................................................................................
(17) Image is out of focus. ...................................................................................................................
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ...................................................................
(19) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering). .....................................................................................
1-5-4 Electrical problems .............................................................................................................................
(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. .............................................
(2) The drive motor does not operate. ...............................................................................................
(3) The scanner motor does not operate. ..........................................................................................
(4) The toner feed motor does not operate. .......................................................................................
(5) Cooling fan motor does not operate. ............................................................................................
(6) Original paper feed motor does not operate. ................................................................................
(7) ST feed motor does not operate. ..................................................................................................
(8) The registration clutch does not operate. .....................................................................................
(9) The paper feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................................
(10) The ST paper feed clutch does not operate. ................................................................................
(11) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. .........................................................................
(12) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................
(13) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ...........................................................................................
(14) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ...........................................................................................
(15) The fixing heater does not turn on (C610). ...................................................................................
(16) The fixing heater does not turn off. ...............................................................................................
(17) Main charging is not performed (C510). .......................................................................................
(18) Transfer charging is not performed. .............................................................................................
(19) No developing bias is output. .......................................................................................................
(20) The copier scans the contact glass when originals are loaded on the DF. ..................................
(21) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated
when the main switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................
(22) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover,
paper conveying cover and optional drawer left cover are closed. ...............................................
(23) Others. ..........................................................................................................................................
1-5-5 Mechanical problems .........................................................................................................................
(1) No primary paper feed. .................................................................................................................
(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................
(3) Skewed paper feed. ......................................................................................................................
(4) The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. .................................................................................
(6) Paper jams. ..................................................................................................................................
(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ...................................................................................
(8) Abnormal noise is heard. ..............................................................................................................
1-5-20
1-5-20
1-5-21
1-5-21
1-5-21
1-5-22
1-5-22
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulleys ............................................................................... 1-6-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys and
ST paper conveying roller (option) ................................................................................................. 1-6-5
(2-1) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys ................................................................. 1-6-5
1-1-2
(2-2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper conveying roller ........................................................... 1-6-8
(3) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley ..................................................................... 1-6-9
(4) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-12
(4-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-12
(4-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing ..................................... 1-6-13
(4-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ........................................................................... 1-6-14
(4-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-15
(4-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-16
2A1/2
1-6-3 Optical section ....................................................................................................................................
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ...................................................................................
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ....................................................................................
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ...............................................................................................
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ......................................................................................................
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit ..............................................................................
(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) ..................................................................................
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) .......................................................................
(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ...................................
(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ...........................................................................
(9) Adjusting the scanner center line .................................................................................................
(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................
1-6-4 Image formation section .....................................................................................................................
(1) Detaching and refitting the image formation unit ..........................................................................
(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit ...............................................................................
(3) Detaching and refitting the drum ..................................................................................................
(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade ...................................................................................
(5) Replace the developer ..................................................................................................................
1-6-5 Transfer section .................................................................................................................................
(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly .....................................................................
1-6-6 Fixing section .....................................................................................................................................
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ...........................................................................................
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor ..........................................................................
(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater .......................................................................................
(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ...............................................................
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ...........................................................................................
(6) Detaching and refitting the press roller .........................................................................................
1-6-7 DF section ..........................................................................................................................................
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwardong pulley and
DF feed pulley (18 cpm copier only) .............................................................................................
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley (18 cpm copier only) ........................................
(3) Adjusting the DF lateral squareness .............................................................................................
(4) Adjusting the DF magnification .....................................................................................................
(5) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration ...................................................................................
(6) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration ....................................................................................
(7) Adjusting the DF center line .........................................................................................................
(8) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF ........................................................
1-6-17
1-6-17
1-6-19
1-6-19
1-6-20
1-6-23
1-6-25
1-6-26
1-6-27
1-6-28
1-6-29
1-6-30
1-6-31
1-6-32
1-6-32
1-6-33
1-6-34
1-6-36
1-6-37
1-6-38
1-6-38
1-6-39
1-6-39
1-6-39
1-6-40
1-6-42
1-6-43
1-6-43
1-6-45
1-6-45
1-6-47
1-6-48
1-6-49
1-6-50
1-6-51
1-6-52
1-6-53
1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-7-1 Replacing the main PCB ...................................................................................................................... 1-7-1
1-7-2 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................ 1-7-3
1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ............................................................................................... 1-7-4
2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-1
2-1-2 Main charging section .......................................................................................................................... 2-1-4
2-1-3 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-6
(1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-7
(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-9
2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-11
(1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-12
1-1-3
(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensor ................................................................................ 2-1-13
(3) Toner density control .................................................................................................................... 2-1-13
(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltage .................................................................................. 2-1-14
(5) Correcting toner output voltage .................................................................................................... 2-1-15
2-1-5 Transfer and separation section ......................................................................................................... 2-1-16
2-1-6 Cleaning section ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-18
2-1-7 Charge erasing section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-19
2A1/2
2-1-8 Fixing section .....................................................................................................................................
2-1-9 DF section ..........................................................................................................................................
(1) SDF (15 cpm copier) ....................................................................................................................
(2) ADF (18 cpm copier) ....................................................................................................................
2-1-20
2-1-22
2-1-22
2-1-23
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ...........................................................................................................................
(1) PCBs ..............................................................................................................................................
(2) Switches and sensors .....................................................................................................................
(3) Motors .............................................................................................................................................
(4) Other electrical components ...........................................................................................................
2-2-1
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-3-5
Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-4
Operation PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3-9
CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-11
Laser diode PCB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-12
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ..........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 2 ..........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 3 ..........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 4 ..........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 5 ..........................................................................................................................................
Chart of image adjustment procedures ..........................................................................................................
Wiring diagram ...............................................................................................................................................
1-1-4
2-4-1
2-4-2
2-4-3
2-4-4
2-4-5
2-4-6
2-4-9
2A1/2
1-1-1 Specifications
Type ............................................... Desktop
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... DF (18 cpm copier): Sheets of paper (Maximum original size: folio/81/2" 14")
DF (15 cpm copier): Sheets of paper (A4R, folio/81/2" 11"R, 81/2" 14")
Platen: Sheets of paper, books, 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: folio/
81/2" 14")
Original feed system ...................... Contact glass: fixed
DF: sheet-through
Copy paper .................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 - 80 g/m2)
Bypass table: Plain paper (60 - 160 g/m2)
Special paper: Transparencies, letterhead, colored paper
and envelopes (when using the printer function only)
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: folio/81/2" 14"
Minimum: A6R /51/2" 81/2"R (When the bypass table is used)
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 50 - 200%, 1% increments
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode (15 cpm copier):
A4R/81/2" 11"R: 15 copies/min.
At 100% magnification in copy mode (18 cpm copier):
A4R/81/2" 11"R: 18 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ Within 6.3 s (A4R/81/2" 11"R, original placed on the platen)
Warm-up time ................................. Within 30 s (room temperature 20C/68F, humidity 65% RH)
In preheat/energy saver mode: Within 30 s (room temperature 20C/68F,
humidity 65% RH) [priorty to power save]
In preheat/energy saver mode: Within 10 s (room temperature 20C/68F,
humidity 65% RH) [priorty to recovery]
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Drawers: 250 sheets
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 50 sheets
Continuous copying ....................... 1 - 99 sheets
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Exposure light source .................... Semiconductor laser
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and N29T black toner
Toner density control: toner sensor
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner container
Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters (900 W for 120 V specifications/1030 W for
220 - 240 V specifications)
Control temperature: 180C/356F (at normal ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection device: 150C/302F thermostat
Fixing pressure: 36.28 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning system ............................ Cleaning blade
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Resolution ...................................... 600 600 dpi
Light source ................................... Inert gas lamp
Dimensions .................................... 15 cpm copier:
497 (W) 497 (D) 376 (H) mm
199/16" (W) 199/16" (D) 1413/16" (H)
18 cpm copier:
497 (W) 497 (D) 445 (H) mm
199/16" (W) 199/16" (D) 171/2" (H)
Weight ............................................ 15 cpm copier: Approx. 25 kg/55 lbs
18 cpm copier: Approx. 27 kg/59.4 lbs
1-1-1
2A1/2
Floor requirements ......................... 691 (W) 497 (D) mm
273/16" (W) 199/16" (D)
Functions ........................................ Self-diagnostics, preheat, automatic copy density control, enlargement/reduction
copy and photo mode
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9 A
220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 4.8 A (average 2.5 A)
Power consumption ....................... 1080 W (120V)
1152 W (220 - 240V)
(Measured value: 982 W (120V)/1131 W (220 - 240V)
Options ........................................... Drawer, memory board (standard for 18 cpm copier), printer board, printer network
board
1-1-2
2A1/2
1-1-2 Parts names

(1) Copier
15 cpm Copier
18 cpm Copier
2 1
4
7
9
8
21
5
4
@ 0
@ 0
)
*
&
Figure 1-1-1
1 DF
2 Original table
3 Original insertion guides
4 DF open/close handle
5 Original eject cover
6 DF original switchback cover
7 Operation panel
8 Paper conveying cover handle
9 Paper conveying cover
0 Multi-Bypass
! Insert guides
@ Support guide
# Toner container
$ Waste toner tank
% Cleaning shaft
^ Front cover
& Main switch
* Copy storage section
( Drawer
) Platen
Original size scales
Length guide
Width guide
Width adjustment lever
Length guide storage section
Drawer bottom plate
Hnadles for transport
Original holder (15 cpm copier only)
1-1-3
2A1/2
(2) Operation panel
Metric
0 ^
%&@ $#
65
Inch
0 ^
%&@ $#
65
Figure 1-1-2
1 Start key (Indicator)

2 Stop/Reset key
3 Size Select keys
4 Data/On-line Indicator
5 Printer key
6 Number of Copies/Zoom (+) key
7 Number of Copies/Zoom () key
8 Zoom Input/Enter key
9 Copy quantity/magnification display
0 Add Toner indicator
! Memory Overflow/Data Error indicator
1-1-4
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
Paper Select key

Drawer indicator
Optional drawer indicator
Multi-bypass indicator
DF indicator
Misfeed indicator
Image mode selection key
2 in 1/4 in 1 key
Sort key (indicator)
Copy exposure adjustment keys
2A1/2
1-1-3 Machine cross section
0
9
8
3
6 7 2
1
5
Light path
Original path
Paper path
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Paper feed section

Main charging section
Optical section
Developing section
Transfer and sparation section
Cleaning section
Charge erasing section
Fixing section
ADF (18 cpm copier)
SDF (15 cpm copier)
1-1-5
2A1/2
1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor drive train)
^
&
*
$
@
%
#
!
0
2
8
4
5
6
As viewed from machine rear
Figure 1-1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-1-6
Drive motor gear

Gear 67/30
Gear 23/16
Gear 37/21
Gear 23
Bypass paper feed clutch gear
Registration clutch gear
Gear 32/18
Paper feed clutch gear
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
Gear 97/25
Drum drive gear 53
Gear 40/45
Gear 41
Gear 28/20
Gear 26/20
Fixing idle gear 44
Gear 25
Heat roller gear
2A1/2
(2) Drive system 2 (scanner motor drive train)
!@
$
4
9
6
8
1

@, #, $ and % are parts of machine front
Figure 1-1-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scanner motor gear

Scanner drive gear 27/13
Scanner belt
Gear Z23
Idle gear 21
Gear Z30
Idle gear 21*
Drive change gear 13*
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
Drive change gear 25*

Gear 25/19*
Conveying gear 20*
Conveying pulley 22*
Conveying pulley 22*
Drive pulley*
Conveying belt*
*: For the 15 cpm copier only.
1-1-7
2A1/2
(3) Drive system 3 (original feed motor (18 cpm copier only) drive train)
6
5
3
4
7
1
2
Figure 1-1-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Original feed motor gear

Feed gear 42/20
Feed drive gear 20
Feed pulley 20
Idle gear 20
Feed drive gear 20
Lift gear 38
(4) Drive system 4 (ST feed motor (optional) drive train)
Figure 1-1-7
1
2
3
4
5
1-1-8
ST feed motor gear

Gear 25/59
Gear 19
Gear 19
ST paper feed clutch gear 20
2A1/2
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 10C/50F and 32.5C/90.5F and at a relative humidity not higher
than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
1-2-2 Developer and toner

Store the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-1
2A1/2
1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5C/50 - 90.5F
2. Humidity: 20 - 85%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 9 A
220 - 240 V AC, 4.8 A (average 2.5 A)
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 0.3%/60 Hz 0.3%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other
strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto
the machine.
Avoid dust and vibration.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1 ).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 300 mm/1113/16"
Machine right: 300 mm/1113/16" Machine left: 500 mm/1911/16"
15 cpm copier
a: 376 mm/1413/16"
b: 462 mm/183/16"
c: 497 mm/199/16"
d: 722 mm/287/16"
e: 497 mm/199/16"
f: 847 mm/335/16"
g: 845 mm/331/4"
c
g
a b
e
f
Figure 1-2-1a Installation dimensions
18 cpm copier
a: 445 mm/171/2"
b: 526 mm/2011/16"
c: 497 mm/199/16"
d: 605 mm/2313/16"
e: 497 mm/199/16"
f: 847 mm/335/16"
g: 871 mm/345/16"
g
a b
e
f
Figure 1-2-1b Installation dimensions
1-2-2
2A1/2
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure
Start
Unpack.
Remove the tapes.
Adjust the fixing pressure.
Remove the tapes, pads and sheet inside the drawer.
Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
Remove the pad inside the machine.
Install a toner container.
Install a waste toner tank.
Attach the original holder (15 cpm copier).
Connect the power cord.
Load paper.
Make test copies.
Completion of the machine installation.
Caution:
Be sure to install a waste toner tank when setting the machine.
1-3-1
2A1/2
Unpack.
15 cpm copier
@
&*(
9
5
$
%
Figure 1-3-1 Unpacking
1 Copier
2 Power cord
3 Upper pads
4 Stay
5 Outer case
6 Bottom pads
7 Tray spacer
8 Machine cover
9 Scanner pin tag
0 Fixing lever tags
! Waste toner tank spacer
1-3-2
@ Original holder
# Bar code labels
$ Drawer spacer
% Front drawer spacer
^ Sheet
& Instruction handbook
* Installation manual
( Business reply mail (120 V specs only)
) Plastic bag
2A1/2
18 cpm copier
&*(
@
)
0
0
9
5
$
%
Figure 1-3-2 Unpacking
1 Copier
2 Power cord
3 Upper pads
4 Stay
5 Outer case
6 Bottom pads
7 Tray spacer
8 Machine cover
9 Scanner pin tag
0 Fixing lever tags
! Plastic bag
@ Pad
# Bar code labels
$ Drawer spacer
% Front drawer spacer
^ Sheet
& Instruction handbook
* Installation manual
( Business reply mail (120 V specs only)
1-3-3
2A1/2
Remove the tapes.
1. Remove the tapes.
15 cpm: 12 pieces/18 cpm: 8 pieces
18 cpm copier
15 cpm copier
Figure 1-3-3
2. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying cover

and then remove the two tapes.
Tapes
Figure 1-3-4
1-3-4
2A1/2
Adjust the fixing pressure.
3. Lift the fixing section release levers and close the
paper conveying cover.
Fixing section
release levers
Figure 1-3-5
Remove the tapes, pads and sheet inside
the drawer.
4. Pull the drawer out and remove the tapes and
two pads.
Caution: Be sure to load paper after the main
switch is turned on and copying is
enabled. Loading paper before turning
the main switch on may cause paper
jams.
Tapes
Pads
Figure 1-3-6
5. Open the DF cover and remove the sheet on the
contact glass.
Sheet
Figure 1-3-7
1-3-5
2A1/2
Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
6. Remove the tapes and two pins for light source
unit 1 and 2.
Tapes
Pins
Figure 1-3-8
7. Open the front cover and store the removed pins

by securing them on the inside of the cover. The
storing locations of the pins are marked inside the
front cover.
Caution: Be sure to refit the pins whenever the
copier is moved.
Pins
Figure 1-3-9
Remove the pad inside the machine.
8. Remove the pad.
Pad
Figure 1-3-10
1-3-6
2A1/2
9. Pull out the tape from the developing section
gently.
Tape
Figure 1-3-11
Install a toner container.
10. Hold the toner container vertically and tap the top
15 times. Turn the container upside-down and tap
the top 15 times. Then, hold the container
horizontally and shake it from side to side 10
times.
Figure 1-3-12
11. Insert the toner container into the copier as far as
it will go and then slide it to the right as indicated
by the marked arrows.
Toner container
Figure 1-3-13
1-3-7
2A1/2
Install a waste toner tank.
12. Install the waste toner tank and close all the
covers and drawers.
Waste toner tank
Figure 1-3-14
Attach the original holder (15 cpm copier only).
13. Install the original holder to the left side of the
copier.
Original holder
Figure 1-3-15
Connect the power cord.
14. Connect the power cord and turn the main switch
on.
Caution: Never turn the power off or open covers
while the copier is driving. Doing so may
cause printing problems or contaminate
the copier internally.
Power cord
Figure 1-3-16
1-3-8
2A1/2
Load paper.
15. Pull the drawer out as far as it will go.
When the optional drawer is installed, do not pull
more than one drawer out at a time.
16. Press the drawer bottom plate down and lock it
there.
Drawer bottom plate
Figure 1-3-17
17. Holding the width adjustment lever, move it to

align the width guide with the required paper
width.
Width adjustment
lever
Width guide
Figure 1-3-18
18. While squeezing the presses on the sides,
remove the length guide and then insert it into the
holes of the required paper length.
Store the length guide in the space shown in the
diagram when the paper touches the right-hand
wall of the drawer.
Length guide
Figure 1-3-19
1-3-9
2A1/2
19. Set the paper flush against the left-hand wall of
the drawer.
* Load paper so that it is kept under the claw of
the drawer.
* When loading paper into the drawer, make sure
that the copy side is facing upward (the copy
side is the side facing upward when the
package is opened.)
* Check that the length and width guides securely
contact the paper. If there is a gap, adjust the
position of the length or width guide to close it.
* Load paper all at once and do not add paper
until all sheets are used up. Adding paper to a
drawer that still contains paper may cause
paper jams.
20. Push the drawer back in gently.
* Check that the paper is kept under the claw of
the drawer. If not, reload the paper.
Claw
Figure 1-3-20
Make test copies.
21. Set the original and make test copies.
Completion of machine installation.
1-3-10
2A1/2
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance
item No.
U254
U255
U256
U258
U260
U342
U348
Contents
Turning auto start function on/off
Setting auto clear time
Turning auto preheat/energy saver
function on/off
Switching copy operation at toner
empty detectionempty detection
Changing the copy count timing
Setting the ejection restriction
Setting the copy density adjustment range
Factory setting
On
90 s
On
Single mode, 70
After ejection
On
Normal
1-3-11
2A1/2
1-3-3 Copier management

In addition to a maintenance function for service, the copier is equipped with a management function which can be
operated by users (mainly by the copier administrator). In this copier management mode, default settings can be
changed.
(1) Executing a copier management item
Executing a default setting item

Start
Press both of the copy exposure

adjustment keys for 3 s.
Select an setting item

using the zoom +/- keys.
Press the enter key.
Execute the default setting item

(see page 1-3-13)
Stop/reset key: on
or select "F00" and enter key: on
End
1-3-12
2A1/2
(2) Default settings
User status report
Outputs the details of the default settings.
1. Select F01 and press the enter key.
User status report is printed out.
Exposure mode
Selects the image mode at power-on.
2. Select the exposure mode and press the enter
key.
Exposure mode: 1 (auto exposure)/
2 (text and photo)/3 (photo)/4 (text)
Exposure steps
Sets the number of exposure steps for the manual
exposure mode.
2. Select 3 steps or 5 steps and press the enter
key.
Setting range: 1 (3 steps)/2 (5 steps)
Auto exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.
2. Select the setting and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 to 5
Text and photo original exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure to be used when text and photo
original is selected for the image mode.
Default drawer
Sets the drawer to be selected in case such as after
the stop/reset key is pressed.
2. Select default drawer and enter key: on
Default drawer: 1 (drawer)/2 (optional drawer)
Note: This setting item will not be displayed if the
optional drawer is not installed.
Automatic drawer switching

Sets if the automatic drawer switching function is
available.
2. Select on or off and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 (on)/2 (off)
Drawer paper size

Sets the size of paper loaded in the drawer.
2. Select the size of paper and press the enter key.
Paper size: 1 (A4R/81/2" 14")/2 (A5R/81/2"
11"R)/3 (Folio/51/2" 81/2"R)
Optional drawer paper size
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional drawer.
2. Select the size of paper and press the enter key.
Paper size: 1 (A4R/81/2" 14")/2 (A5R/81/2"
11"R)/3 (Folio/51/2" 81/2"R)
Non-standard size paper for the bypass tray

Photo original exposure adjustment
Adjusts the exposure to be used when photo original
is selected for the image mode.
Sets if non-standard size paper is available when the

paper is fed from the bypass tray.
Non-standard size paper width setting for bypass tray
Text original exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure to be used when text original is
selected for the image mode.
Sets the paper width when non-standard size is fed

from the bypass tray.
2. Enter the setting and press the enter key.
Setting range is 4.13" to 8.50" (105 to 216 mm).
Note: This setting item will not be displayed if off
is selected in Non-standard size paper for the
bypass tray.
1-3-13
2A1/2
Copy limit
Sets the limit of the number of copies that can be
made at a time.
Setting range is 1 to 99 copies.
DF auto start
Sets whether copies to be made automatically or not
when an original is placed in the DF.
This setting item is not displayed on the 18 cpm
copier.
Layout (4 in 1)
Sets whether to place the originals vertically or
horizontally for 4 in 1 layout copying.
2. Select vertical or horizontal and press the enter
key.
Setting range: 1 (vertical)/2 (horizontal)
Note: This setting item will not be displayed on the
15 cpm copier if the optional memory board is not
installed.
Layout (borderline)
Selects the type of borderline for layout copying.
Setting range: 1 (none)/2 (solid line)/
3 (dotted line)
Note: This setting item will not be displayed on the
15 cpm copier if the optional memory board is not
installed.
Silent mode
Sets the length of time from when copying ends to
when entering the silent mode.
Setting range: 1 (0 s)/2 (5 s)/3 (10 s)/4 (15 s)/
5 (30 s)
Auto shut-off
Sets if the auto shut-off function is available.
1-3-14
Auto preheat time

Sets the auto preheat time.
Setting is available between 5 and 45 min. in 5
min. steps.
Setting range: 1 (5 min.)/2 (10 min.)/3 (15 min.)/
4 (20 min.)/5 (25 min.)/6 (30 min.)/7 (35 min.)/
8 (40 min.)/9 (45 min.)
Sets the auto preheat time to be shorter than the
auto shutoff time.
Auto shutoff time

Sets the auto shut-off time.
Setting is available between 15 and 120 min. in 15
min. steps.
Setting range: 1 (15 min.)/2 (30 min.)/3 (45 min.)/
4 (60 min.)/5 (75 min.)/6 (90 min.)/7 (105 min.)/
8 (120 min.)
Preheat recovery time

Selects the mode of the auto preheat function from
recovery priority mode and power save priority mode.
2. Select the priority mode and enter key: on
Priority mode: 1 (recovery priority mode)/
2 (power save priority mode)
Viewing total counter value

Displays the total number of copies.
The total number of copies are displayed on the
copy quantity/magnification display.
Toner counter report

Outputs the report on the toner consumption ratio.
The list is printed out.
Toner replacement message output setting

Sets if a message requesting the user to replace the
toner container is printed when the toner is used up.
2A1/2
Paper feed shifting adjustment (drawer)
Adjusts displacement of the copy image.
Setting range: -3.0 to +3.0 (1 steps moves 0.1)
Paper feed shifting adjustment (optional drawer)

This setting item will not displayed if the optional
drawer is not installed.
Paper feed shifting adjustment (bypass tray)

Use A4R/81/2" 11"R size paper.
Inch/metric specifications setting

Switches the copier specifications setting between
inch and metric.
2. Select the specifications setting and press the
enter key.
Specifications setting: 1 (inch)/2 (metric)/
3 (metric for Japan)
Folio length setting (drawer)

Sets the length when folio is selected as the paper
size.
2. Select the length and press the enter key.
Length: 1 (210 mm)/2 (216 mm)
This setting item is available only when metric is
selected for the copier specifications.
Folio length setting (bypass tray)

Sets the length when folio is selected as the paper
size.
Setting is available between 200 and 216 mm.
This setting item is available only when metric is
selected for the copier specifications.
1-3-15
2A1/2
1-3-4 Installing the optional drawer

Procedure
1. Remove the tapes, pad and plastic bag from the
optional drawer.
Tapes
Pad
Tape
Tapes
Tape
Figure 1-3-21
2. Place the copier on top of the optional drawer

such that the right and left covers of the copier
become flush with the drawer cover.
Caution: Two people are required to move the
copier. Stand on the front and rear sides
of the copier and hold it tightly by the
handles on the sides. Carrying the copier
standing on its right and left sides or
holding it by the drawer may damage the
copier or cause injury.
Optional drawer
Figure 1-3-22
3. Insert the power plug of the copier to the wall

outlet and turn the main switch on.
Power plug
Figure 1-3-23
1-3-16
2A1/2
4. If installing on a copier set for metric
specifications, pull the optional drawer out as far
as it will go and fit the rear paper stops for the
metric specifications to the optional drawer.
Note: If the rear paper stops for the metric
specifications are not installed, problems
such as a paper misfeed may occur. (The
rear paper stops for the metric
specifications are not necessary when
using inch-sized paper [81/2" 14", 81/2"
11"R or 51/2" 81/2"R]).
Rear paper stop for
the metric specifications
Rear paper stop for

the metric specifications
Figure 1-3-24
5. Load paper into the cassette.

Note: For the details on how to load paper, see
1. How to load paper on page 3-1 in the
instruction handbook of the copier.
6. Affix the drawer size label to the drawer cover
according to the size of paper to be used.
Important:
Be sure to turn the main switch on before loading
paper into the optional drawer. Loading paper
first may cause a paper misfeed when the main
switch is turned on.
Drawer size label
Figure 1-3-25
1-3-17
2A1/2
1-3-5 Installing the printer board/network board (option)

Procedure
1. Remove the tape keeping the cover of the printer
board from rotating.
Printer board
Tape
Figure 1-3-26
2. Remove the printer cover from the copier by

firmly pressing the part marked with a triangle.
Printer cover
Figure 1-3-27
3. Remove the two pins securing the shield cover

and then remove the cover.
Sheild cover
Pins
Figure 1-3-28
1-3-18
2A1/2
4. Insert the printer board as far as it will go.
5. Secure the printer board to the copier using the
two pins removed in step 3.
Printer board
Pins
Figure 1-3-29
6. Remove the knock-out portion of the printer cover

by firmly pressing with a tool, such as a
screwdriver, and refit the printer cover to the
copier.
Note: The printer cover may not be able to be
refit depending on the type of printer cable.
In this case, use the copier without fitting
the printer cover.
Knock-out
portion
Printer cover
Figure 1-3-30
1-3-19
2A1/2
Installing the optional network board
1. Remove the two pins securing the option plate on
the printer board and then remove the plate.
Option plate
Pins
Figure 1-3-31
2. Insert the network board along the rails as far as
it will go.
3. Secure the network board using the two pins.
Pins
Network board
Figure 1-3-32
4. Remove the knock-out portion of the printer cover
by firmly pressing with a tool, such as a
screwdriver, and refit the printer cover to the
copier.
Printer cover
Knock-out
portion
Figure 1-3-33
1-3-20
2A1/2
1-3-6 Installing the memory board (standard for 18 cpm/optional for 15 cpm)
Note: Make sure that the DIMM is securely inserted
on the memory board before starting
installation.
Procedure
1. Remove the printer cover from the copier by
firmly pressing the part marked with a triangle.
Printer cover
Figure 1-3-34
2. Remove the two pins securing the cover on the
copier and then remove the cover.
Cover
Pins
Figure 1-3-35
1-3-21
2A1/2
3. Insert the memory board as far as it will go.
4. Secure the memory board using the two pins
removed in step 2.
Memory board
Pins
Figure 1-3-36
5. Refit the printer cover to the copier.
Printer cover
Figure 1-3-37
1-3-22
2A1/2
1-4-1 Maintenance mode
The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Press the stop/reset key, start key

and the left copy exposure adjustment
key in the order presented and hold
them down.
Press the stop/reset key.
Entering the maintenance mode
Enter the number of the maintenance

Selecting a maintenance item
item to be executed using the copy
exposure adjustment keys or the zoom
+/- keys.
Press the start key.
The maintenance item is run.
Yes
Run the item again?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance

mode?
No
Enter 001 using the copy exposure
Exiting the maintenance mode
adjustment keys or the zoom
+/- keys, and press the start key.
End
Caution:
Do not perform aging without the waste toner tank installed during maintenance service.
1-4-1
2A1/2
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Section
General
Initialization
Drive, paper
feed, paper
conveying and
cooling system
Item
Maintenance item contents
No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
U004 Setting the machine number
U005 Copying without paper
U020 Initializing all data
U021 Initializing memories
U022 Initializing backup data
U030 Checking motor operation
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
U032 Checking clutch operation
U033 Checking solenoid operation
U034 Adjusting the print start timing

Adjusting the leading edge registration
Adjusting the center line
0
0
U035 Setting folio size

Length
Width
Optical
330
210
U042 Setting the LSU type
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

Drawer
Bypass tray
Optional drawer
0
0
0
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

Drive motor
Polygon motor
ST feed motor
0
0
0
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
12
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
U063 Adjusting the shading position
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification

Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the
contact glass
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification
U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing

Adjusting leading edge registration
Adjusting trailing edge registration
0
0
U072 Adjusting the DF center line
U073 Checking scanner operation
U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity
U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off

Setting the mode on/off
Setting the reference data for identifying dust
On
35
U088 Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)
Off
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
U091 Checking shading
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient

Text/text and photo/photo mode
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-4-2
Initial
setting*
2A1/2
Section
High voltage
Item
No.
U100 Setting the surface potential
Initial
setting*
197
U101 Setting high voltages

Developing bias
Transfer voltage
Transfer voltage output timing
200/34
94
256/544
U109 Setting the drum type
Developing
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time
U130 Initial setting for the developer

U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
Fixing and
cleaning
Operation
panel and
support
equipment
Mode setting
157
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
U135 Checking toner feed motor operation
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
U156 Changing the toner control level

Toner feed start level
Toner empty level
113
44
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
U158 Checking/clearing the developing count
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature

Primary stabilization fixing temperature
Secondary stabilization fixing temperature
125
180
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
U199 Checking the fixing temperature
U200 Turning all LEDs on
U203 Operating DF separately
U207 Checking the operation panel keys

U208 Setting the paper size
81/2" 11"
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors
U244 Checking the DF switches
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
45
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
U252 Setting the destination
Inch
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
On
U255 Setting auto clear time
90
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
On
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Single mode,
70
U260 Changing the copy count timing
After ejection
U265 Setting the destination specifications
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
On
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range
Image
processing
U402 Adjusting margins for printing
0
Normal
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
1-4-3
2A1/2
Section
Others
Item
No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
U905 Checking/clearing counts by the DF
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
U917 Setting the reading/writing of backup data
Read
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
U998 Outputting the memory list
1-4-4
Initial
setting*
2A1/2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
item No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the
settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.
2. Select the item to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Output list
d-L
J-L
C-L
List of the current settings of the maintenance modes

List of the paper jam occurrences
List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The test copy mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the selected item appears.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key while a selection item is displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item
No. appears.
U001

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U004
Setting the machine number

Description
Displays and changes the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
2. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.
Copy exposure indicator
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
3. Press the start key. The machine number is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/reset key. The indication for
selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-5
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U005 Copying without paper
Description
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Operation
P
P-d
Only the copier operates.

Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key.

4. Set the operation conditions required. Changes in the following settings can be made.
Paper feed locations
Magnifications
Number of copies: continuous copying is performed when set to 99.
Copy density
Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper
present, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
selected item appears.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/reset key.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key at the screen for selecting an item. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U020
Initializing all data

Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
Purpose
Used when replacing the main PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select on using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Operation
on
Canceling initialization
Executing initialization
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for inch specifications
are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/reset key. The indication for
1-4-6
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U021 Initializing memories
Description
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,
settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according
to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
Display
Operation
on
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting. When initialization is complete, the machine automatically
returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U022
Initializing backup data

Description
Initializes only the data set for the engine or scanner section.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method
2. Select the item to be initialized using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Operation
A
b
Engine
Scanner

Display
Operation
on
5. Press the start key. The data for the engine or scanner section (U060 to 099, U403, U404 and U990) is
initialized.
Completion
1-4-7
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U030 Checking motor operation
Description
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
A
F1
* Optional
Motor
Drive motor (DM)
ST feed motor (STFM)*
3. Press the start key. The selected motor operates.

4. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key after operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U031
Checking switches for paper conveying

Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
While each switch is turned on, a segment of the 7-segment display lights. Segments of the 7-segment
display and the switches correspond as follows:
Segments of the 7-segment display
ON
Switch
Eject switch (ESW)
Registration switch (RSW)
ON
ST feed switch (STFSW)*

ON
* Optional.
Completion
U032
Checking clutch operation

Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display
Clutch
P1
Pb
F1
2F
Paper feed clutch (PFCL)

Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL)*
Registration clutch (RCL)
* Optional.
Completion
1-4-8
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U033 Checking main switch operation
Description
Description
Turns the main switch on by energizing the main switch off solenoid.
Purpose
To check the operation of the main switch off solenoid in auto shutoff mode.
Method
1. Press the start key. "A" appears.
2. Press the start key. The main switch is turned on.
Completion
U034
Adjusting the print start timing

Adjustment
See pages 1-6-10 and 13.
U035
Setting folio size

Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the
actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Setting
2. Change the setting using the zoom +/ keys.
Setting
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Length
Width
330 to 356 mm
200 to 220 mm
330
210
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
U042
Setting the LSU type

Description
Sets the type of the LSU installed in the copier.
Purpose
Used when replacing the LSU.
Method
2. Select the LSU type using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
A
Type A
b
Type b
C
Type C
Initial setting: b
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
U051
Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

Adjustment
See page 1-6-17.
1-4-9
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.
Method
Setting
Copy exposure indicator Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Setting range
Drive motor speed adjustment

9.9 to +9.9
Polygon motor speed adjustment 9.9 to +9.9
ST feed motor* speed adjustment 9.9 to +9.9
Initial setting
0
0
0
Drive motor speed adjustment/ST feed motor speed adjustment (unit: %)

Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes
the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Polygon motor speed adjustment (unit: %)
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and
longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Test copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in test copy mode.
Correct values for an A4/81/2" 11" output are:
A = 260 2.6 mm
B = 180 1.8 mm
B
A
Figure 1-4-1
Adjustment
1. Press the printer key. The machine enters the test copy mode.
2. Press the start key. Output an A4/81/2" 11" VTC pattern.
3. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
A: Drive motor speed adjustment/ST feed motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
appears.
1-4-10
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U060
Description
Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Image scanning density
0 to 23
12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
Test copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in test copy mode.
Completion
appears.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:
Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
U061
Turning the exposure lamp on

Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
1. Press the start key. on appears.
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/reset key.
Completion
U063
Adjusting the shading position

Description
Changes the shading position.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is
due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be
changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Change in value per step
Shading position
15 to +15
0.254 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
Test copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/reset key at the screen for adjustment. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-11
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Description
Adjustment
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-29.
U067
Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-30.
U068
Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF

Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DF.
Purpose
Used when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DF
is used.
Method
Setting
1. Change the setting using the zoom +/- keys.
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Scanning position
for DF originals
15 to +15
0.254 mm
Increasing the setting moves the image backward, and decreasing it moves the image forward.
3. Press the printer key. The carriage moves to the scanning position for DF originals.
4. Press the stop/reset key. The carriage returns to its home position.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key at the screen for adjustment. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U070
Adjusting the DF magnification

Adjustment
See page 1-6-49.
1-4-12
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing
Description
Adjustment
U072
Adjusting the DF center line

Adjustment
See page 1-6-52.
U073
Checking scanner operation

Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
2. Select the item to be changed by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Operating conditions
Setting range
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Magnification
Paper size
On and off of the exposure lamp
50 to 200%
See below.
on or off
Paper size for each setting

Setting
Paper size
Setting
Paper size
9
40
41
42
B5
A4R
B5R
A5R
47
55
56
58
Folio
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"R
51/2" 81/2"R
4. Press the printer key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key when scanning stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-13
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity
Description
Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DF.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and
when scanning an original from the DF.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
DF input light luminosity
0 to 8
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.
Test copy mode
Completion
1-4-14
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off
Description
Turns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF original scanning position is adjusted
automatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference
data for identifying dust.
Reference
In the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing
the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DF original
scanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Purpose
Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slit
glass when the DF is used.
Method
2. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3


1. Select on or oFF using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
on
oFF
DF scanning position adjust mode on

DF scanning position adjust mode off
Initial setting: on
Available only when the mode is turned on.
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Minimum density to be regarded as dust
10 to 95
35
Example
The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of
the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan
data taken when there is no original).
Completion
1-4-15
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U088 Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)
Description
Turns moir reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off.
Purpose
Used to prevent regular density unevenness (moir) on halftone image areas of the copy image in text mode
and text and photo mode. Such moir is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is made
in text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
on
oFF
Moir reduction mode

Normal copy mode
Initial setting: oFF

If moir on the copy image is significant, change the setting to on. Note that when the moir reduction
mode is turned on, the resolution may be slightly reduced.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U089
Outputting a MIP-PG pattern

Description
Selects and outputs a MIP-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Setting
Setting range
Initial setting
G-5
180
1-d
Gray scale
Mono level
1-dot level
0 to 255
-
180
-
3. Press the printer key. The machine enters the PG pattern output mode.
4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
1-4-16
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U091 Checking shading
Description
Description
Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the original
scanning values at nine points of the contact glass.
Purpose
To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decide
the causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shading
or CCD) or other problems.
Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Output list
on
oFF
Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.

Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.
4. Change the measurement point by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy
exposure adjustment keys. For the correspondence between the measurement points and the copy
exposure indicators, see Figure 1-4-2.
100 mm from the machine
center toward machine rear
1
4
7
Machine center
100 mm from the machine
center toward machine front
200 mm from the machine left
Point
3
6
9
150 mm from
machine left
300 mm from machine left
Point
6
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
2
5
8
: Off
: On
: Flashing
5
exp.1
exp.3
exp.5
Figure 1-4-2
1-4-17
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U091
(cont.)
Description
When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightly
different from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there should
be no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rear
indicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.
If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) is
caused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).
If a black line appears, the cause may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation before
shading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation after
shading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possible
to use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning at
the limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.
5. Press the stop/reset key. The selected item appears.
Completion
No. appears.
U092
Adjusting the scanner automatically

Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A168070) on the contact glass.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, Gd appears.
4. Display each setting value after adjustment by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.
Setting value
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Scanner center line

Scanner leading edge registration
Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, nG is displayed and operation stops. Lighting the copy
exposure indicator exp. 3 and then exp. 5 using the copy exposure adjustment keys will display the error
code. Determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust
the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key after auto adjustment is complete. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
If the stop/reset key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-18
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,
text and photo, photo).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used to
make copy image darker or lighter.
Start
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Press the start key. The machine enters the setting mode.
Image mode LEDs
AutoExp.
Description
Density in text mode
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Density in text and photo mode
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Density in photo mode
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On
1-4-19
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting
(cont.)
1. Select the item to be adjusted by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
2. Adjust the setting using the zoom +/ keys.
Copy exposure
indicator
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3

Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3
Setting range
Initial setting
0
0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density
Setting: 3
Setting: 0
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Light
Center
Dark
Density adjustment
Density adjustment range: Normal

Density adjustment range: Special area
Figure 1-4-3 Exposure density gradient

4. Press the stop/reset key. The selected item appears.
Test copy mode
Completion
No. appears.
1-4-20
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U100 Setting the surface potential
Description
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after initializing the set
data.
Start
2. Select the item by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
Image mode LEDs
AutoExp.
Description
Setting the developing bias
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Setting and checking the transfer voltage
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On
Method for main charger output

1. Select the item using the cpoy exposure adjustment keys.
Display (copy exposure indicator)
Description
on1 (exp. 1)
on2 (exp. 3)
Turning the main charger on

Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit
on and off
2. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.

Setting the grid control voltage
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Grid control voltage
0 to 255
197
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
Test copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/reset key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed. The indication for
1-4-21
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U101 Setting high voltages
Description
Description
Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage and
transfer control voltage. Also checks the transfer output voltage.
Purpose
To check and change high voltages other than the main charger voltage.
Start
2. Select the item to be set or checked by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
Image mode LEDs
AutoExp.
Description
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Setting and checking the transfer voltage
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On

keys.
Description
Setting range Initial setting
Exp. 1
Developing bias control voltage

during image formation
Developing bias control voltage
during no image formation
0 to 255
200
0 to 255
34
Exp. 3
Increasing the setting makes the developing bias higher and the image darker; decreasing it makes the
bias lower and the image lighter.
Setting the transfer voltage
keys.
Description
Setting range Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3 (on)
Transfer control voltage

Turning the transfer voltage
output on
Timing at which the transfer voltage
output turns on
Timing at which the transfer voltage
output turns off timing
0 to 255
94
160 to 360
256
450 to 650
544
Exp. 5
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Increasing the exp. 1 setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
Increasing the exp. 5 setting makes the transfer voltage output timing later and improves paper separation
performance.
4. To check the transfer voltage output, light the copy exposure indicator exp. 3 using the copy exposure
adjustment keys and press the start key. The currently set transfer voltage is output.
5. To stop the transfer voltage output, press the stop/reset key.
Test copy mode
Completion
No. appears.
1-4-22
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U109 Setting the drum type
Description
Description
Sets the type of the drum installed in the copier.
Purpose
To prevent variations in halftone due to differences in drum sensitivity.
Method
Setting
1. Select the drum type using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
A
b
C
d
Type A
Type b
Type C
Type d
Initial setting: b
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U110
Checking/clearing the drum count

Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the main charger potential output.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the count using the zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting
a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-23
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U111
Checking/clearing the drum drive time
Description
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 2 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the drive time
00 to 59 (min)
00
000 to 999 (min) 000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting
U130
Initial setting for the developer

Description
Automatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.
Purpose
To set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.
Method
2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.
3. Display the setting value for each item by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy
exposure adjustment keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Toner sensor output value

Toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity
Supplement
The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:
Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)
Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)
Clearing the developing drive time (U157)
Clearing the developing count (U158)
Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
Completion
After initial setting is complete, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-24
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Description
Displays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.
Purpose
To check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is too
dark or light.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting for the toner sensor control voltage is displayed.
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Toner sensor control voltage
0 to 255
157
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.
Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
Completion
U132
Replenishing toner forcibly

Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Toner sensor output value after start key is pressed

Current toner feed start level
Current toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity

Completion
Press the stop/reset key when toner replenishment stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U135
Checking toner feed motor operation

Description
Drives the toner feed motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of the toner feed motor.
Caution
Note that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure to
drive the motor for only a few seconds.
Method
2. Press the start key. The toner feed motor turns on.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key when operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-25
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
Description
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
Purpose
To check the toner sensor output value.
Method
2. Press the start key. Sampling starts.
3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Toner sensor output value after start key is pressed

Current toner feed level (value corrected based on humidity
and drive time)
Current toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity
Exp. 5
Exp. 1 (flashing)
4. Press the stop/reset key. The sampling operation stops.

Completion
U156
Changing the toner control level

Description
Changes the toner feed start level set in maintenance item U130 or the toner empty level to be determined by
the difference from the toner feed start level.
Purpose
To check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
Method
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3

Difference between the toner feed start level and toner empty
level
Setting for the toner feed start level

Description
Setting range
Initial setting
0 to 255
113
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.

Setting for the toner empty level
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Difference between the toner feed start level

and the toner empty level
0 to 255
44
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner empty
is detected.
Completion
1-4-26
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference
when correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developer.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 2 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the drive time
00 to 59 (min)
00
000 to 999 (min) 000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting
U158
Checking/clearing the developing count

Description
Displays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developer.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
Setting
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting
1-4-27
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
Description
Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fixing problem on thick paper.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Copy exposure
indicator
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Primary stabilization fixing temperature

Secondary stabilization fixing temperature
100 to 165 (C)

155 to 195 (C)
125
180
The temperatures are to be set such that exp. 3 exp. 1.

Completion
U162
Stabilizing fixing forcibly

Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
U163
Resetting the fixing problem data

Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. CLE appears.
2. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
Completion
1-4-28
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
Description
Description
Turns the fixing heater on.
Purpose
To check fixing heater.
Method
2. Press the start key. The fixing heater turns on for 1 s and then turns off.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key when fixing heater is off. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U199
Checking the fixing temperature

Description
Displays the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Purpose
To check the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Method
2. Display each temperature by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Fixing temperature (C)

Ambient temperature (C)
Completion
U200
Turning all LEDs on

Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/reset key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the indication for selecting a maintenance
item No. appears.
U203
Operating DF separately
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DF.
Purpose
To check the DF.
Method
2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display (copy exposure indicator)
Operation
d-P (exp. 1)
d-n (exp. 3)
With paper, single-sided original

Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)

5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/reset key.
Completion
Press the stop/reset key when the operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-29
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
2. 1 appears on the copy quantity display and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys on the operation panel are pressed in order from the left to right, the figure shown on the copy
quantity display increases in increments of 1. If there is an LED corresponding to the key pressed, the LED
will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
Completion
After this check starts, the operation cannot be canceled until all the keys are checked.
U208
Setting the paper size

Description
Sets the size of paer loaded in the drawer.
Purpose
Used when changed the paper size in the drawer.
Method
2. Select the paper source by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Paper source
Exp.1
Exp.3
Paper size in the drawer

Paper size in the optional drawer
3. Select the paper size using the zoom +/- keys.

Display
Paper size
A4r/814
A5r/811
b5r/FOL 5H8
A4R/81/2" 14"
A5R/81/2" 11"R
B5R/Folio 51/2" 81/2"R
4.Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
To exit this maintenance mode without the current setting, press the stop/reset key while a selection item is
displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U243
Checking the operation of the DF motors

Description
Turns the motors in the DF on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DF motors.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Indication (copy exposure indicator)
ADF
SDF
F-0 (exp. 1)
Drives the original feed system.
C-0 (exp. 2)
Drives the original conveying

system.
Turns the DF change

solenoid on.
Drives the original
conveying system.
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop/reset key.

Completion
1-4-30
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U244 Checking the DF switches
Description
Description
Displays the status of the switches in the DF.
Purpose
To check if switches in the DF operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key. "-5-" appears.
2. Manually turn on and off each switch to check the status. When the on-status of a switch is detected, the
image mode LED corresponding to the operated switch lights.
Image mode LEDs
AutoExp.
Description
Original set switch (OSSW)
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
DF timing switch (DFTSW)
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Safety switch (SSW)
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
AutoExp.
DF safety switch (DFSSW)
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On
Completion
U250
Setting the maintenance cycle

Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:
Maintenance cycle (number of copies) = setting 1000
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Maintenance cycle
0 to 600
45
1000 (copies)
For example, when set to 120, the maintenance cycle is set to 120000.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-31
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
Setting
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting
U252
Setting the destination

Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running
maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Setting
1. Select the destination using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
JPn
Inc
EUP
ASA
Metric (Japan) specifications

Inch (North America) specifications
Metric (Europe) specifications
Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when
the power is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for
1-4-32
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
Description
Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the
problem.
Method
Setting
1. Select either on or oFF using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
on
oFF
Auto start function on

Auto start function off
Initial setting: on
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-33
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U255 Setting auto clear time
Description
Description
Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the same
settings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Auto clear time
0 to 270
90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.

When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U256
Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off

Description
Selects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/
energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.
Purpose
According to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without the
recovery time from preheat mode.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
on
oFF
Auto preheat/energy saver function on

Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: on
When the setting is changed from oFF to on, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15
minutes.
Completion
1-4-34
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can
be made after the detection.
Method
Start
2. Select the item by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
Image mode LEDs
AutoExp.
Text & Photo
Description
Switching copy operation at toner empty detection between
single or continuous copying
Photo
Text
AutoExp.
Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On
Setting copy operation at toner empty detection between single and continuous copying
1. Select single or continuous copying using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
Sin
Con
Enables only single copying.

Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: Sin

Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection
1. Set the number of copies that can be made using the zoom +/ keys.
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Number of copies after toner empty detection
0 to 200 (copies)
70
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.

When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.
Completion
No. appears.
1-4-35
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U260 Changing the copy count timing
Description
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the eject section when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper
ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.
To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted
before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the
copy timing should be made later.
Method
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
FEd
EJE
When secondary paper feed starts

When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJE

Completion
U265
Setting the destination specifications

Description
Sets whether or not to print the product name on the reports that users print.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting appears.
Setting
1. Enter 0 or 2 using the zoom +/ keys.
Setting
Description
0
2
Product name printed

Product name not printed
Initial setting: 0
Completion
1-4-36
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Description
Sets the factor for converting each paper size into A4/11" 81/2". The black ratio is converted for the A4/
11" 81/2" size using the factor set in this maintenance item. Values set are displayed in the user simulation.
Purpose
To set the factor to convert the black ratio of each paper size for A4/11" 81/2" size.
Method
2. Select copier or printer mode by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Select the paper size to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy
Metric specifications
Copy exposure
indicator
Paper size
Setting range
Initial
setting
Setting for the copier mode
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
Exp. 5 (flashing)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
A4R
B5R
A5R
B6R
A6R
Postcard
Folio
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.0
Setting for the printer mode
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
Exp. 5 (flashing)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
A4R
B5R
A5R
B6R
A6R
Postcard
Folio
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.0
Copy exposure
indicator
Paper size
Setting range
Initial
setting
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"R
51/2" 81/2"R
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"R
51/2" 81/2"R
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Image mode LEDs
: Off,
: On
Inch specifications
Image mode LEDs
Setting for the copier mode
AutoExp.
Text & Photo
Photo
Text
Setting for the printer mode

AutoExp.
Text & Photo
Photo
Text
: Off, : On
Completion
1-4-37
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously.
When the restriction is set, the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously to the internal eject tray will
be limited to 100.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
on
oFF
The number of sheets restricted.

The number of sheets not restricted.
Initial setting: on
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U345
Setting the value for maintenance due indication

Description
Sets when to indicate that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the number of copies that
can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the maintenance indicator flashes.
Purpose
To change the time to display the maintenance due indication.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
First digit
Last 3 digits
0 to 9
000 to 999
0
000
2. Change the setting value using the zoom +/ keys.

Completion
1-4-38
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range
Description
Description
Selects the adjustment range for copy density from NORMAL and SPECIAL AREA (for wider range).
Purpose
To change the setting according to user request.
When especially dark or light density is requested, set to SPECIAL AREA.
Method
Setting
1. Select the density range using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
SPC (special area)

nrL (normal)
5 steps (enlargement mode)

3 steps
Initial setting: Normal

Completion
U402
Adjusting margins of image printing

Adjustment
See page 1-6-15.
U403
Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass

Adjustment
See page 1-6-31.
U404
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF

Adjustment
See page 1-6-53.
U407
Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing

Adjustment
See page 1-6-13.
1-4-39
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the paper feed location (group No.) for which the count is to be checked or cleared by lighting image
mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Change the indication of the copy quantity display by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy
Image mode LED (group No.)
Copy exposure
indicator
Copy quantity display (count value)
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of bypass copy count
AutoExp.
Text & Photo
Exp. 3
Last 3 digits of bypass copy count
Text
Exp. 5
Clearing the count (CLE)
AutoExp.
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of the drawer copy count
Photo
Text & Photo
Exp. 3
Last 3 digits of the drawer copy count
Text
Exp. 5
AutoExp.
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of the optional drawer copy
Photo
Text & Photo
count
Photo
Text
Exp. 3
Last 3 digits of the optional drawer copy

count
AutoExp.
Exp. 5
Exp. 1
Clearing all counts (CLE)
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off, : On
Note: When no optional paper feed device is installed, the counts corresponding to optional paper feed
devices will not appear.
Clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
1. Select the paper feed location to clear the count.
2. Light exp. 5 using the copy exposure adjustment key.
3. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Clearing copy counts for all paper feed locations
1. Select group 4.
2. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.
Completion
1-4-40
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Display the jam code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The jam count appears. If the jam count is a 4-digit value, the first digit and the last 3
digits are displayed alternately.
4. Press the stop/reset key. The jam code appears again.
J10
Stop/
reset key
10
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
J11
Start key
Stop/
Copy exposure reset key
adjustment keys
CLE
Start key
100
Figure 1-4-4
Clearing all jam counts
1. Display CLE using the copy exposure adjustment keys. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.
Completion
U904
Checking/clearing the service call counts

Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Method
2. Display the service call code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The service call count appears. If the service call count is a 4-digit value, the first digit
and the last 3 digits are displayed alternately.
4. Press the stop/reset key. The service call code appears again.
010
Stop/
reset key
10
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
011
Start key
Stop/
Copy exposure reset key
adjustment keys
CLE
Start key
100
Figure 1-4-5
Clearing counts by service call codes
1. Display the service call code to clear the count.
2. Press the stop/reset key. The count is cleared.
Clearing all service call counts
1. Display CLE using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Completion
1-4-41
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U905 Checking/clearing counts by the DF
Description
Description
Displays or clears the counts of the DF.
Purpose
To check the use of the DF. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
Copy quantity display (count value)
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits of the number of original replacement

Last 3 digits of the number of original replacement
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3 using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion
1-4-42
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4/11" 81/2" sheets.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
Display
Operation
on
Canceling the clearing

Executing the clearing
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without clearing the data, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a
maintenance item No. appears.
U917
Setting the reading/writing of backup data

Description
Selects whether to read out the backup data on the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB or to
write backup data on the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB to the main PCB.
When the memory is initialized (maintenance items U020, U021, U022 and U252), this is set to read out the
backup data from the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB. To write the backup data to the main
PCB from the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB, change the setting before starting writing.
Purpose
Used when replacing the main PCB.
Method
2. Select rd or rE using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
rd
rE
Reading out the backup data

Writing the backup data

Completion
1-4-43
2A1/2
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays or clears the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after
replacement.
Method
Copy quantity display
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)

Last 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)
Clearing the lamp-on time (CLE)
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item
No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/reset key. The indication
for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U992
Checking or clearing the printer count

Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer function when the optional printer board is installed.
Purpose
To check the use of the printer function.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 5.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
2. Press the start key. The value is set and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-44
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
Description
Description
Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
PG pattern to be output
Purpose
Center line adjustment
Lateral squareness adjustment

Magnification adjustment
Checking the fixing performance (fixing pressure)
3. Press the printer key. The machine enters the PG pattern output mode.
4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.
Completion
1-4-45
2A1/2
Maintenance
item No.
U998 Outputting the memory list
Description
Description
Outputs the list of memory.
Purpose
To output the list as required.
Method
Entering the address
Description
Setting range
Exp. 1
Exp. 3
Exp. 5
Bit 16 to bit 23 of the address

00 to FF
00 to FF
00 to FF
2. Enter the address in hexadecimal using the zoom +/- keys.

3. Press the start key. The address is set.
Printing the list
1. Press the printer key. The machine enters the list output mode.
2. Press the start key. The list is printed.
Completion
1-4-46
2A1/2
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.
Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.
To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the paper conveying cover or pull the drawer out.
To remove original jammed in the DF, open the DF original switchback cover.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.
1 Misfeed in paper feed section

2 Misfeed in paper conveying section
3 Misfeed in DF
4 Misfeed in optional drawer
2 1
4
Figure 1-5-1
Jam code
Contents
PF
PF
PF
15
20
22
30
40
50
70
72
73
No paper feed from drawer

No paper feed from optional drawer
No paper feed from bypass
Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section
Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section
Multiple sheets in bypass tray
Misfeed in registration/transfer section
Misfeed in fixing section
Misfeed in eject section
No original feed
An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 1
An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 2
See pape
P.1-5-3
P.1-5-3
P.1-5-3
P.1-5-3
P.1-5-3
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-5
P.1-5-5
P.1-5-5
Table 1-5-1
1-5-1
2A1/2
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
SDF (15 cpm copier)

DFTSW
ADF (18 cpm copier)

DFTSW
ESW
RSW
STFSW
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
2A1/2
1. Jam at power-on
One or more of the switches in the paper feed conveying system is on when the main switch is turned on (jam code 00).
2. Paper feed section

No paper feed from drawer (PF appears on the copy quantity display.)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1255 ms of the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on.
PFCL
OFF
ON
RSW
1255 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-1

No paper feed from optional drawer (PF appears on the copy quantity display.)
The ST feed switch* (STFSW) does not turn on within 1327 ms of the ST paper feed clutch* (STPFCL) turning on.
STPFCL*
OFF
ON
STFSW*
1327 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-2

No paper feed from bypass (PF appears on the copy quantity display.)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1390 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on.
BYPPFCL
OFF
ON
RSW
1390 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-3

Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 15)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2590 ms of the ST feed switch* (STFSW) turning on (when paper is
fed from optional drawer).
STFSW*
OFF
ON
RSW
2590 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-4

Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section (jam code 20)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2273
ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the drawer).
RSW
OFF
Paper size + 2273 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-5

*: Optional.
1-5-3
2A1/2
The ST feed switch* (STFSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2273
ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the optional drawer).
STFSW*
OFF
Paper size + 2273 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-6

Multiple sheets in bypass tray (jam code 22)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 5055 ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the bypass tray).
RSW
OFF
5055 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-7
3. Paper conveying section

Misfeed in registration/transfer section (jam code 30)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2590 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
OFF
RCL
RSW
ON
2590 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-8
4. Fixing section
Misfeed in fixing section
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 2809 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
RCL
OFF
ON
ESW
2809 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-9
5. Eject section
Misfeed in eject section
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2809 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.
OFF
ON
RSW
2809 ms
Timing chart 1-5-10
*: Optional.
1-5-4
OFF
ON
ESW
2A1/2
6. DF
No original feed (jam code 70)
During the primary feed of the second or subsequent originals, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on within the
specified number of original feed motor (OFM) pulses after the original feed motor (OFM) turns on. The DF timing switch
(DFTSW) still fails to turn on after up to 5 retries (ADF)/3 retries (SDF) of the original feed operation.
OFM
OFF
ON
DFTSW
Specified number of pulses*
OFF
ON
*: SDF: 1386 P (800 ms)

ADF (1): 7707 P (2200 ms)
ADF (2 - 5): 5605 P (1600 ms)
Timing chart 1-5-11

An original jam in the original feed and conveying sections 1 (jam code 72)
During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn off within the specified number of original
feed motor (OFM) pulses after turning on.
DFTSW
OFF
ON
*: SDF: 8400 P (4849 ms)

ADF: 6476 P (time varies depending
on the magnification)
Timing chart 1-5-12

An original jam in the original feed and conveying sections 2 (jam code 73)
During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns off within the specified number of original feed motor
(OFM) pulses after turning on.
DFTSW
OFF
ON
*: SDF: 2217 P (1280 ms)

ADF: 1393 P (time varies depending
on the magnification)
Timing chart 1-5-13
1-5-5
2A1/2
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem
Causes/check procedures
(1)
A paper jam in the
paper feed,
conveying, fixing or
eject section is
indicated as soon as
the main switch is
turned on.
A piece of paper torn from

copy paper is caught
around the registration
switch, the ST feed switch*,
eject switch or the DF timing
switch.
Check visually and remove any found.
Defective registration
switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN3-14 on the main PCB, check if CN313 on the main PCB remains low when the registration switch is
turned on and off. If it does, replace the registration switch.
Defective ST feed switch*.
With 5 V DC present at CN5-9 on the main PCB, check if CN5-2

on the main PCB remains low when the ST feed switch* is
turned on and off. If it does, replace the ST feed switch*.
Defective eject switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN11-6 on the main PCB, check if

CN12-5 on the main PCB remains low when the eject switch is
turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject switch.
Defective DF timing
switch.

CN11-10 on the main PCB remains low when the DF timing
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the DF timing
switch.
Paper in the drawer is

extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed

pulleys are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed. (see page 16-3).
Broken registration switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the registration switch if its actuator

is broken.
switch.

clutch malfunctions.
Check and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the

paper feed clutch.
Check (see page 1-5-24).
Paper in the optional

drawer* is extremely
curled.
Change the paper.

pulleys of optional drawer*
are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 16-5).
Broken ST feed switch*

actuator.
Check visually and replace the ST feed switch* if its actuator is

broken.

Check if the ST paper feed

clutch* malfunctions.

ST paper feed clutch*.
(2)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from drawer).
PF appears on the
copy quantity
display.
(3)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from optional
drawer*).
PF appears on the
copy quantity
display.
*: Optional.
1-5-6
Corrective measures
2A1/2
Problem
(4)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from bypass).
PF appears on the
copy quantity
display.
Paper in the bypass tray is

extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the bypass paper

feed pulleys are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 16-9).

actuator.

is broken.
switch.
turned on and off. If not, replace the registration switch.
Check if the bypass paper

feed clutch malfunctions.

bypass paper feed clutch.

actuator.
Check visually and replace the ST feed switch* if its actuator is

broken.


actuator.

is broken.
switch.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.
Check if the right and left

registration rollers contact
each other.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.

actuator.
Check visually and replace the drawer feed switch*1 if its

actuator is broken.


actuator.

is broken.
switch.
Check if the right and left

registration rollers contact
each other.
(5)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (jam in
copier vertical paper
conveying section).
Jam code 15
(6)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in paper feed
section).
Jam code 20
(7)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in bypass).
Jam code 22
Corrective measures
*: Optional.
1-5-7
2A1/2
Problem
Corrective measures
(8)
A paper jam in the
paper conveying
section is indicated
during copying (jam
in registration/
transfer section).
Jam code 30
Check if the registration


registration clutch.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.
(9)
A paper jam in the
fixing section is
indicated during
copying (jam in
fixing section).
Jam code 40
Check if the registration


Broken eject switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is

broken.


actuator.

is broken.
switch.
Broken eject switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is

broken.

Broken DF timing switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the DF timing switch if its actuator is

broken.
Defective DF timing
switch.

switch.
Check if the original paper

feed motor is
malfunctioning.
Check and remedy.
Check if the DF forwarding

pulley, DF original feed
pulley or DF separation
pulley is deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages

1-6-45 and 47).
(10)
A paper jam in the
eject section is
indicated during
copying (jam in eject
section).
Jam code 50
(11)
An original jam in
the DF is indicated
during copying (no
original feed).
Jam code 70
1-5-8
2A1/2
Problem
(12)
An original jam in
the DF is indicated
during copying (An
original jam in the
original feed and
conveying sections).
Jam code 72, 73
Corrective measures
Broken DF timing switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the DF timing switch if its actuator is

broken.
Defective DF timing
switch.

switch.
Check if the original paper

feed motor is
malfunctioning.
Check and remedy.
Check if the DF forwarding

pulley, DF original feed
pulley or DF separation
pulley is deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages

1-6-45 and 47).
1-5-9
2A1/2
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled. "C" and a number
between 011 and 731 altenates, indicating the nature of the problem.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes

Code
C011
C021
C040
C041
C043
*: Optional.
1-5-10
Contents
Remarks
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
Backup memory data problem

Data in the specified area of the
backup memory does not match the
specified values.
Problem with the

backup memory
data.
Turn safety switch off and back on and run

maintenance item U020 to set the contents
of the backup memory data again.
Defective backup
RAM.
If the C011 is displayed after re-setting the

backup memory contents, replace the
backup RAM.
Printer board* communication

problem
There is no reply after 20 retries at
communication.
Poor contact in
the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN20

on the main PCB and the connector on the
printer board. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective main
PCB or printer
board.
Replace the main PCB or printer board and

check for correct operation.
Poor contact of
the memory
board**.
Check the insertion of the memory board**.
DIMM installed
incorrectly.
Check if the DIMM is inserted into the

socket on the memory PCB correctly.
Defective DIMM.
Replace the DIMM and check for correct

operation.
Poor contact of
the memory
board**.
DIMM installed
incorrectly.
Check if the DIMM is inserted into the

socket on the memory PCB correctly.
Defective DIMM.
Replace the DIMM and check for correct

operation.
Poor contact of
the memory
board**.
Defective main
PCB or memory
board.
Replace the main PCB or memory board

and check for correct operation.
DIMM* problem
Information on DIMM cannot be read
out correctly at power-on.
Bitmap problem
There is a problem with the data or
address bus of the bitmap DRAM.
DMA problem
DMA transmission of compressed,
decompressed, rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data does not
complete within the specified period
of time.
**: Standard for 18 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.
2A1/2
Code
Contents
C100
Exposure lamp problem

Check the CCD input value for the
lighting status of the exposure lamp
100 ms after the exposure lamp is lit
and the carriage is moved to the
shading position. If the exposure lamp
does not light, turn off the lamp. After
500 ms, light the lamp again and, a
further 500 ms later, check the CCD
input.
The exposure lamp does not light
after 5 retries.
C104
C310
C400
Optical system problem

After AGC, correct input is not
obtained at CCD.
Scanner carriage problem

The home position is not correct
when the power is turned on or at the
start of copying using the contact
glass.
Polygon motor synchronization

problem
The polygon motor does not reach a
stable speed within 19 s of the polygon
motor remote signal turning on.
Remarks
Causes
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.

on the main PCB, and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Repair or replace
if necessary.
Defective
exposure lamp.
Replace the exposure lamp.
Defective main
PCB or inverter
PCB.
Replace the main PCB or inverter PCB and

Incorrect shading
position.
Adjust the position of the contact glass

(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position switch.
CCD PCB output

problem.
Replace the ISU.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.

on the main PCB, and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Repair or replace
if necessary.
Defective
exposure lamp.
Replace the exposure lamp.
Defective main
PCB or inverter
PCB.
Replace the main PCB or inverter PCB and

Incorrect shading
position.
Adjust the position of the contact glass

(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position switch.
CCD PCB output

problem.
Replace the ISU.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.

on the main PCB and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Remedy or
replace if necessary.
Defective scanner
home position
switch.
Replace the scanner home position switch.
Defective main
PCB.
Replace the main PCB and check for

correct operation.
Defective scanner
motor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN3 on

the main PCB and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Remedy or replace if
necessary.
Defective polygon
motor.
Replace the LSU.
1-5-11
2A1/2
Remarks
Code
Contents
C400
Polygon motor synchronization

problem
The polygon motor does not reach a
stable speed within 19 s of the polygon
motor remote signal turning on.
Defective power
source PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is present at CN1-2 on

the power source PCB. If not, replace the
power source PCB.
C401
Polygon motor steady-state problem

The polygon motor rotation is not
stable for 400 ms after the polygon
motor rotation has been stabilized.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN3 on

the main PCB and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Remedy or replace if
necessary.
Defective polygon
motor.
Replace the LSU.
Defective power
source PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is present at CN1-2 on

the power source PCB. If not, replace the
power source PCB.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.

Defective LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Defective main
PCB.
Replace the main PCB and check for

correct operation.
Poor contact of
the high-voltage
transformer PCB
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for

continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective highvoltage
transformer PCB.
Replace the high-voltage transformer

PCB.
Leakage during
main charging.
Check and clean the main charger unit.
Deformed highvoltage
transformer PCB
terminal spring.
Replace the spring.
Fixing heater
installed
incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Broken fixing
heater wire.
Check for continuity. If none, replace fixing

heater.
Poor contact in
the fixing unit
thermistor
connector
terminals.

Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace

the fixing unit thermistor.
C420
C510
C610
1-5-12
BD steady-state problem
The VTC detects a BD error for 800
ms after the polygon motor rotation
has been stabilizad.
Main charger problem

MC ALM signal is detected
continuously for 800 ms when MC
REM signal is turned on.
Broken fixing heater wire

It takes 15 s or more for the fixing
temperature to reach 50C/122F
after the power is turned on or the
safety switch is turned off and on.
from 50C/122F.
temperature to reach the secondary
stabilization fixing temperature from
the primary stabilization fixing
temperature.
Causes
2A1/2
Code
C610
C620
C630
C710
Contents
Remarks
Causes
Broken fixing heater wire

after the power is turned on or the
safety switch is turned off and on.
from 50C/122F.
temperature to reach the secondary
stabilization fixing temperature from
the primary stabilization fixing
temperature.
Fixing unit
thermistor
installed
incorrectly.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the

fixing unit thermostat.
Abnormally low fixing unit

thermistor temperature
The fixing temperature remains below
90C/194F for 10 s during copying.
Fixing heater
installed
incorrectly.
Broken fixing
heater wire.
Check for continuity. If none, replace fixing

heater.
Poor contact in
the fixing unit
thermistor
connector
terminals.

Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace

Fixing unit
thermistor
installed
incorrectly.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the

fixing unit thermostat.
Abnormally high fixing unit

thermistor temperature
The fixing temperature exceeds
230C/446F for 10 s.
Shorted fixing unit

thermistor.
Measure the resistance. If it is 0 , replace

Broken fixing
heater control
circuit on the
power source
PCB.
Replace the power source PCB.
Toner sensor problem

The sensor output voltage is outside
the range of 0.5 to 4.5 V during toner
control.
The toner sensor control voltage
cannot be set within the setting range
when maintenance item U130 is run.
Defective toner
sensor.
Replace the toner sensor.
Poor contact of
the toner sensor
connector
terminals.

Developer
problem.
Replace the developer.
1-5-13
2A1/2
Code
C730
C731
1-5-14
Contents
Broken external temperature
thermistor wire
The input voltage is above 4.5 V.
Short-circuited external temperature

thermistor
The input voltage is below 0.5 V.
Remarks
Causes
Poor contact of
the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.

Defective external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB.
Poor contact of
the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.

Defective external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB.
2A1/2
1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears
(entirely white).

(entirely black).
(3) Image is too light.
(4) Background is visible.
See page 1-5-16
See page 1-5-16
See page 1-5-17
See page 1-5-17
(5) A white line appears

longitudinally.
(6) A black line appears

longitudinally.

laterally.
(8) One side of the copy

image is darker than
the other.
See page 1-5-17
See page 1-5-18
See page 1-5-18
See page 1-5-18
(9) Black dots appear on

the image.
See page 1-5-19

(13) Paper creases.
See page 1-5-20

(17) Image is out of focus.
See page 1-5-21
(10) Image is blurred.
See page 1-5-19

(14) Offset occurs.
See page 1-5-20

(18) Image center does not
align with the original
center.
See page 1-5-22
(11) The leading edge of the

image is consistently
misaligned with the
original.
See page 1-5-19

(15) Image is partly missing.
See page 1-5-21
(12) The leading edge of the

image is sporadically
misaligned with the
original.
See page 1-5-20

(16) Fixing is poor.
See page 1-5-21
(20) Image contrast is low

(carrier scattering).
See page 1-5-22
1-5-15
2A1/2
(entirely white).
Causes
1. No transfer charging.
Causes
1. No transfer charging.
A. The connector terminals of the high-voltage
transformer PCB make poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the

connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
B. Defective main PCB
Check if CN6-8 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item
U101 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.
C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-8 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.

(entirely black).
Causes
1. No main charging.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
Causes
1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire.
Replace the main charger unit.
B. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
C. The connector terminals of the high-voltage


D. Defective main PCB.
E. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if main charging takes place when CN1-3 on the high-voltage

transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If
not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

A. The connector terminals of the exposure
lamp make poor contact.

B. Defective inverter PCB.
Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN2-1 and 2-4 on the
inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,
replace the inverter PCB.
C. Defective main PCB.
Check if CN12-1 and 12-2 on the main PCB go low when

maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.
1-5-16
2A1/2
(3) Image is too
light.
Causes
1. Insufficient toner.
2. Deteriorated developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Causes
1. Insufficient toner.
If the add toner indicator lights, replace the container.
Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it

has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached,
replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).
(4) Background is visible.
Causes
Causes
(5) A white line appears

longitudinally.
Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it

has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
3. Flawed drum.
4. Dirty shading plate.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
Clean the main charger wire or, if it is flawed, replace the main
charger unit.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace the

developer.
3. Flawed drum.
Replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).
4. Dirty shading plate.
Clean the shading plate.
1-5-17
2A1/2
longitudinally.
Causes
1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Causes
Clean the contact glass.
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-34).
Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-36).
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Clean the scanner mirror.
(7) A black line appears laterally.
Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
Clean any part contaminated with toner or carrier in the developing

section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
(8) One side of the

copy image is
darker than the
other.
Causes
1. Dirty main charger wire.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Causes
1. Dirty main charger wire.
Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main charger
unit.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace

the exposure lamp (see page 1-6-17).
1-5-18
2A1/2
(9) Black dots appear
on the image.
Causes
Causes
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-34).
Clean the contact glass.
(10) Image is blurred.
Causes
1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Causes
1. Scanner moves erratically.
Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner
rails. If any, remove it.
2. Deformed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-43).
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
(11) The leading edge of

the image is consistently misaligned with
the original.
Causes
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge
registration.
Causes
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-13).
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge

registration.
Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-29).
1-5-19
2A1/2
(12) The leading edge of
the image is sporadically misaligned with
the original.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch
or paper feed clutch installed or operating
incorrectly.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch Check the installation position and operation of the registration
or paper feed clutch installed or operating
clutch, bypass paper feed clutch and paper feed clutches. If any of
incorrectly.
them operates incorrectly, replace it.
(13) Paper creases.
Causes
1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective pressure springs.
Causes
1. Paper curled.
Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp.
Replace the pressure springs.
(14) Offset occurs.
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
1-5-20
2A1/2
(15) Image is partly missing.
Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
3. Drum condensation.
4. Flawed drum.
Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
Replace the paper.
3. Drum condensation.
Clean the drum.
4. Flawed drum.
(16) Fixing is poor.
Causes
1. Wrong paper.
3. Flawed press roller.
Causes
1. Wrong paper.
Check if the paper meets specifications.
Replace the pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-43).
(17) Image is out of

focus.
Causes
1. Defective image scanning unit.
Causes
1. Defective image scanning unit.
Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-25).
1-5-21
2A1/2
(18) Image center does not Causes
align with the original 1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
center.
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Causes
1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
Readjust the center line of image printing (see pages 1-6-14).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-30).
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Place the original correctly.
(19) Image contrast is

low (carrier scattering).
Causes
1. No developing bias output.
Causes
1. No developing bias output.

A. Developing bias wire makes poor contact.
Check the developing bias wire. If there are any problems, replace it.
B. The connector terminals of the high-voltage


C. Defective main PCB.
D. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if developing bias is output when there is no problem with the

main PCB while maintenance item U030 is run. If not, replace the
high-voltage transformer PCB.
1-5-22
2A1/2
1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem
Causes
No electricity at the power

outlet.
Measure the input voltage.
The power cord is not

plugged in properly.
Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
The front cover, paper

conveying cover and/or left
cover of the optional
drawer* are/is not closed
completely.
Check the front cover, paper conveying cover and left cover of
the optional drawer*.
Broken power cord.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Defective main switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the

main switch.
Blown fuse in the power

source PCB.
Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing and

replace the fuse.
Defective safety switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the

safety switch.
Defective ST safety
switch*.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the ST

safety switch*.
Defective power source

PCB.
With AC present, check for 5 V DC at CN1-7 on the power

source PCB, 12 V DC at CN1-8 and 24 V DC at CN1-2. If none,
replace the power source PCB.
Poor contact in the drive

motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Broken drive motor gear.
Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary.
Defective drive motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor operates when CN13-5 on the main PCB goes low. If not, replace the
drive motor.
(3)
The scanner motor
does not operate.
Broken scanner motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scanner
motor.
Poor contact in the scanner motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(4)
The toner feed
motor does not
operate.
Broken toner feed motor

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the toner
feed motor.
Poor contact in the toner

feed motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
(5)
Cooling fan motor
does not operate.
Broken cooling fan motor

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan
motor.
Poor contact in the cooling

fan motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
(1)
The machine does
not operate when
the main switch is
turned on.
(2)
The drive motor
does not operate .
*: Optional.
1-5-23
2A1/2
Problem
Causes
(6)
Original feed motor
does not operate.
Broken Original feed motor

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace Original

feed motor.
Poor contact in the

Original feed motor
connector terminals.

connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
(7)
ST feed motor*
does not operate.
Broken ST feed motor*

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace ST feed

motor*.
Poor contact in the ST

feed motor* connector
terminals.

connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
(8)
The registration
clutch does not
operate.
Broken registration clutch

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the

Poor contact in the

registration clutch

(9)
The paper feed
clutch does not
operate.
Broken paper feed clutch

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paper
feed clutch.
Poor contact in thepaper

feed clutch connector
terminals.

(10)
The ST paper feed
clutch* does not
operate.
Broken ST paper feed

clutch* coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the ST

paper feed clutch*.
Poor contact in the ST

paper feed clutch*

(11)
The bypass paper
feed clutch does not
operate.
Broken bypass paper feed

clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass
paper feed clutch.
Poor contact in the bypass

paper feed clutch

(12)
The cleaning lamp
does not turn on.
Poor contact in the

cleaning lamp connector
terminals.

Defective cleaning lamp.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.
Poor contact in the

exposure lamp connector
terminals.

Defective inverter PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn on when CN12-1 and CN12-2
on the main PCB are held low, replace the inverter PCB.
(14)
The exposure lamp
does not turn off.
Defective inverter PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn off when CN12-1 and CN12-2
on the main PCB are held high, replace the inverter PCB.
(15)
The fixing heater
does not turn on
(C610).
Broken wire in fixing

heater.
Check for continuity across the heater. If none, replace the

heater.
Fixing unit thermostat

triggered.
Check for continuity across the thermostat. If none, remove the

cause and replace the thermostat.
(13)
The exposure lamp
does not turn on.
*: Optional.
1-5-24
2A1/2
Problem
Causes
(15)
The fixing heater
does not turn on
(C610).
Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace the fixing unit

thermistor.
(16)
The fixing heater
does not turn off.
Dirty sensor part of the

fixing unit thermistor.
Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.
(17)
Main charging is not
performed (C510).
Broken main charger wire.
See page 1-5-16.
Leaking main charger

housing.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCB
Defective main PCB.
Defective high- voltage
transformer PCB .
(18)
Transfer charging is
not performed.

See page 1-5-16.
Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB .
(19)
No developing bias
is output.
Poor contact in the

developing bias wire.
See page 1-5-22.

Defective main PCB.
Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB .
(20)
The copier scans
the contact glass
when originals are
loaded on the DF.
Poor contact in the DF

original detection switch

Defective DF original
detection switch.
Check if CN11-13 on the main PCB goes low when the DF

original detection switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at
CN11-14 on the main PCB. If not, replace the DF original
detection switch.
(21)
A paper jam in the
paper feed, paper
conveying or fixing
when the main
A piece of paper torn from

copy paper is caught
around the registration
switch, ST feed switch*,
eject switch or DF timing
switch.
Check and remove if any.
switch.
*: Optional.
1-5-25
2A1/2
Problem
Causes
(21)
A paper jam in the
paper feed, paper
conveying or fixing
when the main


Defective DF timing
switch.

switch.
(22)
The message
requesting covers to
be closed is
displayed when the
front cover, paper
conveying cover
and optional drawer
left cover* are
closed.
Poor contact in the

connector terminals of
safety switch or ST safety
switch*.

Defective safety switch or

ST safety switch*.
Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If there

is no continuity when the switch is on, replace it.
(23)
Others.
Wiring is broken, shorted

or makes poor contact.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Noise.
Locate the source of noise and remove.
*: Optional.
1-5-26
2A1/2
1-5-5 Mechanical problems

Problem
(1)
No primary paper feed.
Check if the surfaces of the following pulleys

are dirty with paper powder: paper feed
pulleys, ST paper feed pulleys* and bypass
paper feed pulleys.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feed pulleys are

deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed

pulleys (see page 1-6-3).
Electrical problem with the following

electromagnetic clutches: paper feed clutch,
ST paper feed clutch* and bypass paper
feed clutch.
See pages 1-5-24.
Check if the surfaces of the left and right

registration rollers are dirty with paper
powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Electrical problem with the registration

clutch.
See page 1-5-24.
(3)
Skewed paper feed.
Deformed width guide in a drawer.
Repair or replace if necessary .
Check if a pressure spring along the paper

conveying path is deformed or out of place.
Repair or replace.
(4)
The scanner does not
travel.
Check if the scanner wire is loose.
Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-619).
The scanner motor malfunctions.
See page 1-5-23.
(5)
Multiple sheets of paper
are fed at one time.
Deformed drawer claw.
Check the drawer claw visually and correct

or replace if necessary.
Check if the paper is curled.
Change the paper.
(6)
Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled.
Change the paper.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying

path.
Check visually and replace any deformed

guides.
Check if the contact between the right and

left registration rollers is correct.

Replace the pressure spring if it is
deformed.
Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or

deformed.
Clean or replace the press roller.
Check if the contact between the heat roller

and its separation claws is correct.
Repair if any springs are off the separation

claws.
(7)
Toner drops on the
paper conveying path.
Check if the developing section of the image

formation unit is extremely dirty.
Clean the developing section of the image

formation unit.
(8)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears

operate smoothly.
Grease the bearings and gears.
Check if the following electromagnetic

clutches are installed correctly: paper feed
clutch, ST paper feed clutch* and bypass
paper feed clutch.
Correct.
(2)
No secondary paper
feed.
Corrective measures
*: Optional.
1-5-27
2A1/2
1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions
Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.
When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be
seriously damaged.
Do not perform aging without the waste toner tank installed during maintenance service.
Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
* Capable of measuring RMS values.
Prepare the following as test originals:
1. NTC (new test chart)
2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)
1-6-1
2A1/2
(2) Running a maintenance item
Start
Press the stop/reset key, start key

and the left copy exposure adjustment
key in the order presented and hold
them down.
Enter the number of the maintenance

item to be executed using the copy
exposure adjustment keys or the zoom
+/- keys.
Entering the maintenance mode
Selecting a maintenance item
The maintenance item is run.
Yes
Run the item again?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance

mode?
No
adjustment keys or the zoom +/- keys,
and press the start key.
End
1-6-PB
2A1/2
1-6-2 Paper feed section

High-voltage transfer PCB
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulleys

Follow the procedure below to replace the paper feed pulleys.
Procedure
1. Remove the printer cover and rear cover. Pull
out the drawer.
2. Remove the four screws and then detach the
high-voltage transfer PCB.
Figure 1-6-1
3. Remove the stop ring and then the paper
feed clutch.
Stop ring
Paper feed clutch
Figure 1-6-2
Stop ring
4. Remove the stop ring snd bushing from the

paper feed shaft unit.
Bushing
Figure 1-6-3
1-6-3
2A1/2
5. Remove the paper feed shaft unit from the
lower front side of the machine.
Paper feed shaft unit
Figure 1-6-4
6. Remove the screw holding each of the paper
feed pulleys and then the pulleys.
7. Replace the paper feed pulleys and refit all
the removed parts.
Before returning the drawer, turn the main
switch on.
When refitting the paper feed clutch, the
stopper of the paper feed clutch must be
firmly into the groove of the machine.
Paper feed pulleys
Figure 1-6-5
1-6-PB
2A1/2
(2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys and ST paper conveying roller (option)
Follow the procedure below to replace the ST paper feed pulleys or ST paper conveying roller.
(2-1) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys
Procedure
1. Remove the optional drawer from the
machine.
2. Remove the screw holding the rear cover of
the optional drawer and then the cover.
Rear cover
Figure 1-6-6
3. Remove the drawer wire from the wire
retainer of the upper rear cover.
Drawer wire
Wire retainer
Figure 1-6-7
4. Remove the four screws holding the upper
rear cover and then the cover.
Upper rear cover
Figure 1-6-8
1-6-5
2A1/2
5. Open the left cover of the optional drawer.
6. Remove the screw holding ST drive motor
PCB.
7. Remove the four screws holding the ST
paper feed unit and then the unit.
ST paper feed unit
ST drive motor PCB
Left cover
Figure 1-6-9
8. Remove the stop ring from the rear side of
the ST paper feed unit and detach the ST
paper feed clutch.
Stop ring
ST paper feed clutch
Figure 1-6-10
9. Remove the stop ring and bushing.
Bushing
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-11
1-6-PB
2A1/2
10. Remove the bushing from the front side of the
ST paper feed unit and detach the ST paper
feed shaft unit.
ST paper feed unit
Bushing
Figure 1-6-12
11. Remove the screw holding each of the ST

paper feed pulleys and then the pulleys.
12. Replace the ST paper feed pulleys and refit
all the removed parts.
When refitting the ST paper feed clutch, the
stopper of the ST paper feed clutch must be
ST paper feed pulleys
Figure 1-6-13
1-6-7
2A1/2
(2-2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper conveying roller
Procedure
1. Remove the ST paper feed unit (see page 16-5).
2. Remove the stop ring and two gears toward
the rear side of the ST paper feed unit.
Gear
Gear
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-14
3. Remove the stop ring and the bushing.
Stop ring
Bushing
Figure 1-6-15
4. Remove the stop ring and bushing from the
front side of the ST paper feed unit and
detach the ST paper conveying roller.
5. Replace the ST paper conveying roller and
refit all the removed parts.
ST paper conveying roller
Stop ring
Bushing
Figure 1-6-16
1-6-PB
2A1/2
(3) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the printer cover, rear cover and left
cover.
2. Remove the image formation unit (see page
1-6-32).
3. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).
4. Remove the screw and then the fulcrum pin.
Fulcrum pin
Figure 1-6-17
5. Remove the paper conveying unit.
Paper conveying unit
Figure 1-6-18
6. Remove the three screws holding the bypass
cover and then the cover.
Bypass cover
Figure 1-6-19
1-6-9
2A1/2
7. Remove the stop ring and then the bypass
paper feed clutch.
Stop ring
Bypass paper feed clutch
Figure 1-6-20
Bypass paper feed shaft unit
8. Remove the stop ring and bushing holding

the bypass paper feed shaft unit and then the
unit.
Stop ring
Bushing
Figure 1-6-21
9. Remove the grounding plate, bushing and
stop ring and then the bypass paper feed
pulley.
Stop ring
Bushing
Bypass paper feed pulley
Grounding plate
Figure 1-6-22
1-6-PB
2A1/2
10. Replace the bypass paper feed pulley and
Refit the bypass paper feed pulley so that
the one-way clutch is machine rear.
When refitting the bypass paper feed shaft
unit, check that the hole in the grounding
plate is inserted over the projection under
the bypass lift plate.
When refitting the paper feed clutch, the
stopper of the paper feed clutch must be
Ground plate
Projection
Figure 1-6-23
1-6-11
2A1/2
(4) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement
Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.
(4-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034
U066
(P. 1-6-29)
U071
(P. 1-6-50)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
Leading edge registration

Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Correct image

adjustment keys or zoom +/- keys.
Output
example 1
Figure 1-6-24
Select the items to be adjusted using

the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Exp. 1 (lit): Leading edge registration
from the drawer
Exp. 3 (lit): Leading edge registration
from the bypass tray
Press the start key
Press the printer key and the machine

enters the test copy mode.
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
to output a test pattern.
Is the leading edge

registration correct?
Yes
Press the stop/reset key to exit
maintenance mode.
End
1-6-PB
No
For output example 1, decrease

the value using the zoom ()
key.
For output example 2, increase
the value using the zoom (+)
key.
Setting range: 9.9 +9.9
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves the
leading edge by 1.0 mm.
Output
example 2
2A1/2
(4-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading
edge of the original during memory copying.
U034
(P. 1-6-12)
U066
(P. 1-6-29)
U407
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Original

Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-25


The new setting is stored.
Press the start key

and make a test copy.
Is the leading edge

registration correct?
No
For copy example 1, decrease the

value using the zoom () key.
For copy example 2, increase the
value using the zoom (+) key.
Yes
Press the stop/reset key to
exit maintenance mode.
Setting range: 10 +10

Initilal setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves
the leading edge by 1 mm.
End
1-6-13
2A1/2
(4-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when
paper is fed from the drawer.
U034
U067
(P. 1-6-30)
U072
(P. 1-6-52)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
Center line of printing
Start
Correct image

Output
example 1
Figure 1-6-26
Select the item to be adjusted using

Exp. 5 (lit): Center line from the drawer
Exp. 1 (flashing): Center line from
the bypass tray
Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key
Is the image correct?

Yes
Press the stop/reset key to exit
maintenance mode.
End
1-6-PB
No
For output example 1, decrease

the value using the zoom () key.
For output example 2, increase
the value using the zoom (+) key.
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves the
center line by 1 mm.
Output
example 2
2A1/2
(4-4) Adjusting the margins for printing
Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U403
(P. 1-6-31)
U402
U404
(P. 1-6-53)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in
maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Printer leading edge margin

(3 2.5 mm)

Ejection direction
(reference)
Printer
right margin
(2.0+2.0
1.5 mm)
Printer
left margin
(2.0+2.0
1.5 mm)

Exp. 1 (lit): Printer leading edge margin
Exp. 3 (lit): Printer left/right margins
Exp. 5 (lit): Printer trailing edge margin
Exp. 1 (flashing): Printer trailing edge
margin of non-standard size from
the drawer*
Exp. 3 (flashing): Printer trailing edge
margin of non-standard size from
the bypass tray*

Printer trailing edge margin

(3 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-6-27
* Amount of image loss (msec)

after the registration switch turns off

Press the start key

Are the margins correct?
Yes
Yes
Proceed to
another mode?
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the zoom (+)
No
key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the zoom ()
key makes the margin narrower.
Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)
Printer leading edge margins: 0 +10 (3/0.5 mm)
Printer left/right margin: 5 +10 (2.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin: 5 +10 (4.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard size
from the drawer: 0 +400 (214/1 msec)
Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard size
from the bypass tray: 0 +400 (200/1 msec)
End
1-6-15
2A1/2
(4-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded.
Procedure
Start

Original

Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-28

Exp.1 (lit): Drawer
Exp.3 (lit): Bypass tray
Exp.5 (lit): Optional drawer


Press the start key

to make a test copy.
Is the leading
edge of the image missing
or varying randomly (copy
example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the zoom (+) key.
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
No
End
1-6-PB
Yes
Decrease the value using the zoom () key.

Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 changes
the amount of slack by 0.32 mm.
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
the smaller the value, the smaller
the amount of slack.
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
1-6-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp
Replace the exposure lamp as follows.
Contact glass
Procedure
1. Remove the printer cover and right cover and
then the contact glass.
Right cover
Figure 1-6-29
2. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the
machine.
3. Detach the exposure lamp connector from the
inverter PCB.
Cutout
Inverter PCB
Connector
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-6-30
1-6-17
2A1/2
4. Remove the two screws holding the exposure
lamp and then the lamp.
5. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the
removed parts.
Exposure lamp
Figure 1-6-31
1-6-18
2A1/2
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires
Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
Procedure
1. Remove the right cover, left cover, rear cover,
upper front cover and contact glass.
2. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the
machine.
3. Detach the inverter wire from the inverter
PCB.
Inverter wire
Figure 1-6-32
4. Remove the screw holding each of the front
and rear wire retainers.
5. Remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner
unit.
Wire retainer
Wire retainer
Figure 1-6-33
6. Unhook the round terminal of the scanner
wire from the scanner tension spring on the
right side of the scanner unit.
7. Remove the scanner wire.
Scanner tension springs
Figure 1-6-34
1-6-19
2A1/2
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires
Caution:
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: P/N 2A11208 (gray)
Machine rear: P/N 2A11209 (black)
Fitting requires the following tools:
Two frame securing tools (P/N 2A168080)
Scanner motor unit
Procedure
1. Remove the four screws holding the scanner
motor unit and then the unit.
Figure 1-6-35
2. Remove the screw and the gear.
Gear
Figure 1-6-36
E ring
E ring
Scanner wire drum shaft
3. Remove the each E ring and bushing from

the front and rear of the scanner wire drum
shaft and then remove the scanner wire drum
shaft from the scanner unit.
Bushing
Bushing
1-6-20
Figure 1-6-37
2A1/2
4. Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner
wires into the hole in the respective scanner
wire drum and wind the scanner wire two
turns inward and eight turns outward.
Use the gray wire at the machine front and
the black wire at the machine rear.
5. Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the
scanner unit.
Make sure that the locating balls point
downward.
Machine rear (black)
Machine front (gray)
8 turns outward
8 turns outward
2 turns inward
Locating
ball
2 turns inward
Scanner wire drum
Locating
ball
Figure 1-6-38
6. Insert the two frame securing tools into the
positioning holes at the front and rear of the
scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in
position.
Frame securing tool
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-39
1-6-21
2A1/2
7. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above to
below. .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
8. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. .............................................................. 2
Figure 1-6-40
9. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire pulleys at the right of the
scanner unit, winding from below to above. .................................................................................................... 3
10. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above to
below. .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
11. Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the right of the scanner unit. ....... 5
12. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 6
Figure 1-6-41
13. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools.
14. Gather the scanner wires toward the locating balls.
15. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position.
16. Refit all the removed parts.
1-6-22
2A1/2
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit
Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and remove the waste
toner tank and toner container.
2. Remove the printer cover and right cover.
3. Detach the two connector of the operation
unit.
Connectors
Figure 1-6-42
4. Remove the two screws holding the eject tray

and then the tray.
Eject tray
Figure 1-6-43
5. Remove the three screws holding the laser
scanner unit.
Laser scanner unit
Figure 1-6-44
1-6-23
2A1/2
6. Detach the two connector and remove the
laser scanner unit.
When removing the connector that is
covered with a sponge, remove the sponge
first.
7. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all
the removed parts.
Fit the sponge packing with the new scanner
unit.
8. Run the maintenance item U042 to set the
type of LSU. See the label on the LSU.
Sponge
Connectors
Figure 1-6-45
1-6-24
2A1/2
(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)
Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be checked or replaced.
Procedure
1. Remove the printer cover, right cover and
contact glass.
2. Remove the rear cover and the shield cover.
3. Detaach connectors CN16 and CN17 on the
main PCB.
CN17
CN16
Figure 1-6-46
ISU cable plate
4. Remove the ISU cable plate.

5. Remove the four screws holding the ISU
ISU cover
Figure 1-6-47
6. Remove the four screws holding the ISU and
then the ISU.
7. Replace the ISU and refit all the removed
parts.
8. Run maintenance items U065, U066 and
U067 to adjust the copy image.
ISU
Figure 1-6-48
1-6-25
2A1/2
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained).
Caution:
Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-16) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image,
and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.
Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for
the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Original
Place the original
on the contact glass.
Figure 1-6-49
Retighten the two screws and
refit the contact glass.
Press the start key and make

a test copy at 100% magnification.
Yes
No
Remove the contact glass.

Loosen the two screws and
adjust the position of the
mirror 2 frame.
For copy example 1,
move the frame in the direction of
the white arrow ( ).
For copy example 2,
move the frame in the direction of
the black arrow ( ).
End
Screws
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-50
1-6-26
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
U053
(P. 1-4-10)
U065
(auxiliary scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-28)
U065
(main scanning
direction)
U067
(P. 1-6-30)
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Also, perform (7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (page 1-6-28) and (9)
Adjusting the scanner center line (page 1-6-30) after this adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Original
Copy
example
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-51
Select Exp. 1 (main scanning

direction) using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.


The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press

the start key to make a test copy.
Yes
End
No

Initial setting: 0
the magnification by 0.1%.
Increasing the value makes
the image wider, and decreasing it
makes the image narrower.
1-6-27
2A1/2
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
U053
(P. 1-4-10)
U065
(main scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-27)
U065
(auxiliary scanning
direction)
U070
(P. 1-6-49)
Caution:
Procedure
Start
Original

Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-52
Select Exp. 3 (auxiliary scanning
direction) using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.


The new setting
is stored.

Yes
End
1-6-28
No

Initial setting: 0
Increasing the value makes
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
2A1/2
(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration
Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034
(P. 1-6-12)
U071
(P. 1-6-50)
U066
Caution:
Procedure
Start

Original

Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-53


The new setting
is stored.

Is the scanner
leading edge registration
correct?
Yes
No
For copy example 1, increase

For copy example 2, decrease
Setting range : 15 +15
Initial setting: 0
the leading edge by 0.17 mm.
End
1-6-29
2A1/2
(9) Adjusting the scanner center line
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
U034
(P. 1-6-14)
U072
(P. 1-6-52)
U067
Caution:
Procedure
Scanner center line
Start
Original

Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-54


The new setting
is stored.

Is the scanner
center line correct?
Yes
End
1-6-30
No

Initial setting: 0
the center line by 0.17 mm.
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U402
(P. 1-6-15)
U404
(P. 1-6-53)
U403
Caution:
Procedure
Scanner leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm)
Start
Ejection direction
(reference)
Scanner
left margin
(3 2.5 mm)
Scanner
right margin
(3 2.5 mm)


Scanner trailing edge margin
(3 2.5 mm)

Exp. 1(lit): Scanner left margin
Exp. 3(lit): Scanner leading edge
margin
Exp. 5(lit): Scanner right margin
Exp. 1(flashing): Scanner trailing
edge margin
Figure 1-6-55


The new setting
is stored.


Yes
Yes
Proceed to another mode?
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the zoom
(+) key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the
zoom () key makes the margin
narrower.
Scanner left margin: 0 +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)
Scanner leading edge margin: 0 +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)
Scanner right margin: 0 +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)
Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)
No

End
1-6-31
2A1/2
1-6-4 Image formation section

(1) Detaching and refitting the image formation unit
Follow the procedure below to replace or check the image formation unit.
Prucedure
1. Pull the drawer out and open the front cover,
bypass tray and paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the waste toner tank and toner
container.
3. Remove the two screws holding the waste
toner tank cover and then the cover.
4. Remove the screw holding the developing
retainer and then the retainer.
Waste toner tank
Developing retainer
Figure 1-6-56
5. Remove the two screws and datach the
connector and remove the image formation
unit.
Image formation unit

Connector
Figure 1-6-57
1-6-32
2A1/2
(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit
Follow the procedure below to replace the charger assembly.
Prucedure
1-6-32).
2. Remove the screw holding the main charger
assemby and then the assembly.
3. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the
removed parts.
When fitting the main charger unit, hold it
down and fit it close to the cleaning unit.
Main charger unit
Figure 1-6-58
1-6-33
2A1/2
(3) Detaching and refitting the drum
Follow the procedure below to replace the drum.
Cautions:
Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and fitting the drum.
When removing the drum, spread paper underneath as there is a possibility of toner spill. Toner spill can be reduced by
inserting an approximately 20-mm thick pad under the image formation unit toward the developing section and removing
the drum with the unit slightly tilted.
Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
After removing the drum, keep it in the drum case or storage bag to protect the surface from light.
Prucedure
1-6-32).
2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-633).
3. Remove the four screw and blade spring, and
then open the cleaning unit.
Slide the cleaning blade back and forth and
insert an approximately 4 to 4.5-mm thick
spacer between the retainer at the rear of
the cleaning unit and the housing.
Spacer
Blade spring
Cleaning unit
Figure 1-6-59
4. Remove the screw holding the drum
grounding plate and then the plate.
5. Remove the E ring from the drum shaft.
E ring
Drum grounding plate
Figure 1-6-60
1-6-34
2A1/2
6. Remove the screw holding the upper
developing seal and then the seal.
Upper developing seal
Figure 1-6-61
7. Pull the drum shaft out and remove the drum.
Detach the drum horizontally.
8. Replace the drum and refit all the removed
parts.
When replacing the drum, insert a sheet of
paper between the drum and developing
roller to prevent damage to the drum.
Check the letter indicating the drum type
printed on the new drum flange.
Securely insert the drum shaft as far as it
will go. When turning the drum shaft, turn it
in the direction indicated by the arrow
marked on the image formation unit frame.
Rotate the drum in its rotational direction
and check that the cleaning blade does not
flip up.
9. After replacing the drum, run maintenance
items below.
U109 Setting the drum type (set to the
drum type printed on the new drum flange)
U110 Checking/clearing the drum
count(clear the drum count)
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive
time (clear the value)
Drum
Drum shaft
Figure 1-6-62
1-6-35
2A1/2
(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade
Follow the procedure below to replace the cleaning blade.
Prucedure
1-6-32).
2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-633).
3. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-34).
4. Remove the two screws and remove the
cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade
Figure 1-6-63
5. Replace the cleaning blade and refit all the
removed parts.
Apply toner or white powder to the edge of
the new cleaning blade.
After fitting the cleaning blade, slide it to the
right and left once and check that the right
and left edges of the blade do not ride over
or enter under the seal.
Rotate the drum shaft in the direction of the
arrow marked on the image formation unit
frame and check that the cleaning blade
does not flip up.
Cleaning blade
Figure 1-6-64
1-6-36
2A1/2
(5) Replace the developer
Follow the procedure below to replace the developer.
Prucedure
1-6-32).
2. Remove the screw and washer. While lifting
the hooks upward, slide the developing
section cover until removed.
3. Replace the developer and refit all the
removed parts.
When disposing of the developer, tilt the
image formation unit in the direction of A
shown in the diagram and rotate the
developing spiral gear.
Never turn the magnet roller when the drum
is installed.
When refitting the developing section cover,
make sure that the cover and the three
hooks of the housing engage securely.
4. Run the maintenance item U130 to set the
initial setting for the developer.
Developing section cover
Hook
Hook
Hook
Figure 1-6-65
1-6-37
2A1/2
1-6-5 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly
Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller assembly.
Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying
unit.
2. Remove the transfer roller assembly.
Caution: Remove the transfer roller assembly
carefully to prevent the residual toner in the
transfer roller assembly from spilling.
3. Replace the transfer roller assembly and refit
all the removed parts.
Transfer roller assembly
Figure 1-6-66
1-6-38
2A1/2
1-6-6 Fixing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.
Procedure
1. Open the paper conveying unit and remove
the left cover.
2. Remove the two screws and detach the three
connector and then remove the fixing unit.
Connector
Fixing unit
Connectors
Figure 1-6-67
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor
Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit thermistor.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
fixing unit thermistor.
3. Replace the fixing unit thermistor and refit all
the removed parts.
Fixing unit thermistor
Figure 1-6-68
1-6-39
2A1/2
(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater
Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater.
Procedure
2. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit front
Fixing unit front cover
Figure 1-6-69
Fixing heater wire
3. Remove the two screws and detach the fixing

heater wire from the fixing thrmostat.
Fixing heater wire
Nuts
Figure 1-6-70
4. Remove the screw holding the fixing heater
front retainer and then the retainer.
Fixing heater front retainer
Figure 1-6-71
1-6-40
2A1/2
5. Pull out the fixing heater from the fixing unit.
6. Replace the fixing heater and refit all the
removed parts.
Do not touch the glass surfaces of the fixing
heater with bare hands.
Fixing heater
Figure 1-6-72
1-6-41
2A1/2
(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws
Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.
Procedure
2. Remove the fixing heater (see page 1-6-40).
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing heater
rear retainer and then the retainer.
Fixing heater rear retainer
Figure 1-6-73
4. Remove the gear.
5. Remove the two screws and detach the
upper fixing unit.
Nut
Upper fixing unit
Gear
Nut
Figure 1-6-74
6. Remove the springs from the heat roller
separation claws and then the claws.
7. Replace the heat roller separation claws and
Heat roller separation claws
Springs
Figure 1-6-75
1-6-42
2A1/2
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller
Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.
Procedure
2. Remove the four heat roller separation claws
(see page 1-6-42).
3. Remove the two C rings, gear and two
bushings and then remove the heat roller.
4. Replace the heat roller and refit all the
removed parts.
C ring
Bushing
Bushing
Heat roller
C ring
Gear
Figure 1-6-76
(6) Detaching and refitting the press roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller.
Procedure
2. Remove the upper fixing unit (see page 1-642).
3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
guide plate and then the plate.
Fixing guide plate
Figure 1-6-77
1-6-43
2A1/2
4. Move the fixing pressure release lever to the
the release position (in the direction of 1).
5. While holding the fixing pressure release
levers outward, push the fixing pressure
release levers further.
Fixing pressure
release lever
Fixing pressure
release lever
Figure 1-6-78
6. Remove each of two bearings and fixing
pressure release levers and then remove the
press roller.
7. Replace the press roller and refit all the
removed parts.
Bearing
Press roller
Bearing
Fixing pressure release lever
Fixing pressure
release lever
Figure 1-6-79
1-6-44
2A1/2
1-6-7 DF section
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulley (18 cpm copier only)
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley or DF feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the two screws holding the DF lower
left cover and theb the cover.
DF lower left cover
Figure 1-6-80
DF original switchback cover
2. Remove the stop ring, then remove the DF

original switchback cover.
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-81
Stop rings
Detaching the DF forwarding pulley

3. Remove the two stop rings, then remove the
DF forwarding pulley assembly.
4. Remove the DF forwarding pulley, and clean
or check the pulley.
DF forwarding pulley
Figure 1-6-82
1-6-45
2A1/2
Detaching the DF feed pulley
5. Remove the stop ring and bushing and pull
the DF feed shaft unit out.
DF feed shaft unit

Stop ring
Bushing
Figure 1-6-83
6. Remove the stop ring, and then remove the

DF feed pulley. Clean or check the pulley.
Stop ring
DF feed pulley
Figure 1-6-84
1-6-46
2A1/2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley (18 cpm copier only)
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the DF original switchback cover
(see page 1-6-45).
2. Remove the screw holding the original feed
guide and then the guide.
To remove the original feed guide, pull it and
then lift it upward.
Original feed guide
Figure 1-6-85
3. Remove the DF separation pulley assembly.
4. Remove the stop ring, then remove the DF
separation pulley. Clean or replace the pulley.
DF separation pulley
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-86
1-6-47
2A1/2
(3) Adjusting the DF lateral squareness
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained) when the DF is
used.
Procedure
Start
Place an original on the DF

Retighten the screw and

close the DF.
Open the DF, loosen the screw

and adjust the position of the
DF.
For copy example 1, move the
DF in the direction of the black
arrow ( ).
For copy example 2, move the
DF in the direction of the white
arrow ( ).
Yes
No
End
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-87
Screw
Figure 1-6-88
1-6-48
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
(4) Adjusting the DF magnification
Adjust magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction if magnification is incorrect when the DF is used.
U053
(P. 1-4-10)
U065
(P. 1-6-28)
U070
Caution:
Procedure
Main scanning
direction
Start
Auxiliary
scanning
direction

Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-89



Yes
Press the stop/reset key
to exit maintenance mode.
End
No
Change the setting.

key to make the copy image
longer.
the value using the zoom (-)
keys to make the copy image
shorter.
Initial setting: 0
Increase the value makes
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
1-6-49
2A1/2
(5) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the original and the copy image.
U034
(P. 1-6-12)
U066
(P. 1-6-29)
U071
Caution:
Procedure
Start

Copy
example 1
Original
Figure 1-6-90
Select Exp. 1 (DF leading edge

registration) using the copy


Place an original on the

DF and make a test copy.
Yes
End
1-6-50
No
For copy example 1,

increase the value using
the zoom (+) key.
For copy example 2,
decrease the value using
the zoom (-) key.
Initial setting: 0
the copy image by 0.254 mm (15 cpm)/
0.295 mm (18 cpm).
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
(6) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration
Perform the following adjustment if the original scanning end position is not correct when the DF is used.
Caution:
If the copy image looks like copy example 2, clean the DF original scanning section.
Procedure
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Press the start key
Figure 1-6-91
Select Exp. 3 (DF trailing edge
registration) using the copy


Yes
to exit maintenance mode..
End
No
For copy example 1,

increase the value using
the zoom (+) key.
For copy example 2,
decrease the value using
the zoom (-) key.
Initial setting: 0
the copy image by 0.254 mm (15 cpm)/
0.295 mm (18 cpm).
1-6-51
2A1/2
(7) Adjusting the DF center line
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image.
U034
(P. 1-6-14)
U067
(P. 1-6-30)
U072
Caution:
Procedure
Reference
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-92

adjustment keys or zoom +/- keys


The new setting
is stored.

Yes
End
1-6-52
No
Change the setting.

key.
the value using the zoom (-) key.
Initial setting: 0
the center line by 0.17 mm.
Copy
example 2
2A1/2
(8) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF
Perform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.
U402
(P. 1-6-15)
U403
(P. 1-6-31)
U404
Caution:
Procedure
DF leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm)
Start
Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(3 2.5 mm)
DF right margin
(3 2.5 mm)


DF trailing edge margin
(3 2.5 mm)

Exp. 1 (lit): DF left margin
Exp. 3 (lit): DF leading edge margin
Exp. 5 (lit): DF right margin
Exp. 1 (flashing): DF trailing edge margin
Figure 1-6-93


Place an original on the DF and press


Yes
Yes
Proceed to another mode?

No
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the
zoom (+) key makes the margin
wider.
Decreasing the value using the
zoom (-) key makes the margin
narrower.
DF left margin: 0 +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)
DF leading edge margin: 0 +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)
DF right margin: 0 +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)
DF trailing edge margin: 0 +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)

End
1-6-53
2A1/2-1
1-7-1 Replacing the main PCB

Main PCB replacement requires the following tools:
Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)
NVRAM (P/N NAS09010)
Procedure
Before replacing the main PCB (backing up the machine data)
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the
Upper shield cover
power plug. Remove the right cover.
2. After removing the printer cover, remove the 6
screws of machine shield cover. And then,
remove the upper shield cover, lower shield
cover and shield cover.
3. If the memory board is installed, remove the
memory board.
Shield cover
Lower shield cover
Figure 1-7-1
4. Fit the NVRAM to the memory tool PCB.

Caution:
After fitting the NVRAM, do not remove it until
the writing of the machine data completes.
5. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and
connect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.
Note:
Insert the memory tool PCB along the upper
and lower guides.
Memory tool PCB
CN1
LED2
LED1
NVRAM
Figure 1-7-2
1-7-1
2A1/2
6. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 1 s off for 1 s)
for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data on the SRAM of the main PCB will be backed up on the NVRAM.
7. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, backing up of machine data is complete.
If an error occurs while the machine data is being backed up, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns given
below according to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective corrective
measures and then back up the machine data again.
LED1
---
: On for 0.25 s
-: Off for 0.25 s
Off
Description
Corrective measures
WRITE is selected in maintenance

item U917.
Run maintenance item U917 and select READ.
Since the NVRAM contains data

from the previous operation, data
cannot be written to it.
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and back

up the machine data again.
The machine data was not transmitted from the SRAM on the main
PCB to the NVRAM correctly.
Turn the main switch off and on and back up the machine
data again. If the error persists, replace the NVRAM.
8. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
9. Remove the memory tool PCB.
10. Replace the main PCB.
After replacing the main PCB (writing the machine data)
11. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on.
12. Upgrade the firmware on the main PCB. See pages 1-7-3.
13. Turn the main switch on.
14. Enter maintenance mode.
15. Run maintenance item U020.
16. Run maintenance item U252 and set the destination.
17. Run maintenance item U917 and select WRITE.
18. Exit maintenance mode.
19. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
20. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and connect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.
Note:
Insert the memory tool PCB along the upper and lower guides.
21. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 0.5 s off for
0.5 s on for 0.5 s off for 0.5 s on for 1 s off for 0.5 s) for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data on
the NVRAM will be written to the SRAM on the main PCB.
22. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, writing of the machine data is complete.
If an error occurs while the machine data is being written, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns given below
according to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective corrective measures and
then write the machine data again.
LED1
Description
Corrective measures
READ is selected in maintenance

item U917.
Run maintenance item U917 and select WRITE.
An NVRAM with no backup data is

used. (LED1 flashes for 10 s in the
pattern on for 1 s and off for 1 s, and
then flashes in the pattern described
on the left.)
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and then

back up the machine data again.
--
The machine data on the NVRAM

may be damaged (checksum error).
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and back

up the machine data again.
Off
The machine data was not

transmitted from the NVRAM to the
SRAM on the main PCB correctly
(SRAM problem).
Turn the main switch off and on and write the machine
data again. If the error persists, replace the main PCB.
--: On for 0.25 s

-: Off for 0.25 s
: On for 0.25 s
-: Off for 0.25 s
: Off for 1 s
23. Remove the memory tool PCB and refit all the removed parts.
1-7-2
2A1/2
1-7-2 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:
Flash tool assembly (P/N 35968010)
Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)
Master ROM: Main ROM IC (P/N 2A168050)
Procedure
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the
power plug.
2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
shield cover and then the cover after removed
the printer cover.
3. If the memory board is installed, remove the
memory board.
Upper shield
cover
Figure 1-7-3
4. Fit the master ROM into the IC3 socket on the

flash tool assembly.
5. Connect CN2 on the flash tool PCB to CN2 on
the memory tool PCB.
6. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and
connect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.
Note:
Insert the memory tool PCB along the upper
and lower guides.
7. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch
on. LED2 (green) on the flash tool assembly
flashes and upgrading of the master ROM
starts.
8. When flashing LED2 (green) remains lit after
approximately 30 to 40 seconds, upgrading of
the master ROM is complete.
9. Turn the main switch on.
10. Remove the memory tool PCB.
Important:
C021 may be indicated on the operation
panel while upgrading the firmware. However,
it does not interfere with the upgrading
operation.
Memory tool PCB

Flash tool
assembly
CN1
IC3 CN2
CN2
LED2
Master ROM
Figure 1-7-4
1-7-3
2A1/2
1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.
High-voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301
Inverter PCB: VR1
1-7-4
2A1/2
2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper from
the upper drawer, lower drawer or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed
takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.
Each drawer can hold up to 250 sheets of paper. The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets of paper.
Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the paper feed pulley. Paper is fed from the bypass tray by the rotation of
the bypass paper feed pulley.
#
3
0
%
6
7
^
Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section

1 Paper feed pulley
2 ST paper feed pulley*
3 Bypass paper feed pulley
4 Right registration roller
5 Left registration roller
6 Paper conveying roller*
7 Paper conveying pulley*
8 Drawer bottom plate
9 Paper conveying guide*
0 Bypass lift
! Paper feed clutch (PFCL)
@ ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL)
# Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
$ Regisuration clutch (RCL)
% Registration switch (RSW)
^ ST feed switch* (STFSW)
*: Optional.
RCL
RCL
RSW
PFCL
RSW
PFCL
CN6-6
CN3-13
CN6-4
MPCB
BYPPFCL
BYPPFCL
STFSW
STFSW*
STPFCL*
STPFCL
CN6-1
CN5-2
CN5-8
*: Optional.
Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram
2-1-1
2A1/2
Start key
PVSYNC
DM
a
PFCL
150 ms
RSW
d
150 ms
RCL
160 ms
300 ms
Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the drawer

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start primary paper feed.
b: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
on for 300 ms.
c: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary
paper feed.
d: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
off.
Start key
PVSYNC
DM
a
BYPPFCL
150 ms
RSW
b
RCL
d
150 ms
160 ms
300 ms
Timing chart 2-1-2 Paper feed from the bypass tray

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start primary
paper feed.
b: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
on for 300 ms.
c: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary
paper feed.
d: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
off.
2-1-2
2A1/2
Start key
PVSYNC
DM
a
STFM
50 ms
STPFCL
b
150 ms
STFSW
RSW
c
RCL
e
150 ms
160 ms
300 ms
Timing chart 2-1-3 Paper feed from the optional drawer

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the ST feed motor (STFM) turns on.
b: 50 ms after the ST feed motor (STFM) turns on, the ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start
primary paper feed.
c: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
on for 300 ms.
d: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary
paper feed.
e: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
off.
2-1-3
2A1/2
2-1-2 Main charging section

The main charging section consists of the drum and main charger unit. The drum is electrically charged plus by means of
a grid to form a latent image on the surface. The shield grid ensures that the charge is applied uniformly.
Main charger unit
Tungsten wire
Drum
Shield grid
Figure 2-1-3 Main charging section
HVTPCB
MC
GRID
CN1-1
CN1-3
CN1-4
Drum
CN1-5
MPCB
24 V DC
MC REM
GRID CONT
MC ALM
CN6-15
CN6-13
CN6-12
CN6-11
Figure 2-1-4 Main charging section block diagram
2-1-4
2A1/2
Start key
Video
DM
95 ms
MC REM
95 ms 4
95 ms 4
100 ms
GRID CNT
95 ms
ESW
Timing chart 2-1-4 Main charging

a: When the Video signal is received from the optical section, main charging (MC REM) starts.
b: 95 ms after main charging (MC REM) starts, the grid control voltage (GRID CNT) increases in stages.
c: 100 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the grid control voltage (GRID CNT)
decreases in stages.
d: 95 ms after the grid control voltage (GRID CNT) turns off, main charging (MC REM) completes.
2-1-5
2A1/2
2-1-3 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frames and the image scanning unit for scanning and the laser
scanner unit for printing.
Figure 2-1-5 Optical section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
2-1-6
Mirror 1 frame
Exposure lamp (EL)
Mirror 1
Inveter PCB (INPCB)
Mirror 2 frame
Mirror 2
Mirror 3
Image scanning unit (ISU)
Lens
CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
DF open/close switch (DFOCSW)
Scanner motor (SM)
Scanner home position switch (SHPSW)
Laser scanner unit (LSU)
2A1/2
(1) Original scanning
The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the image
scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to
side. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DF is used, the scanner and mirror
frames stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.
Original
EL
CN1-1
CN1-6
CN15-1
CN15-6
CN15-10
CN12-1
CN12-6
CN2-1
CN2-6
DFOCSW
CN17-1
CN17-6
SM
CN1-1
CN1-10
SHPSW
CN11-2
INPCB
CN16-1
CN16-10
CCDPCB
MPCB
Figure 2-1-6 Optional section block diagram
MSW
DFCHSOL
Lamp-on confirmation, AGC and shading
800 ms
800 ms
412 P
Fwd.rotation
SM
Rev.rotation
160 P
800 P
35 ms
EL
400 P
SHPSW
When the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) is off at power-on
Timing chart 2-1-5 Scanner operation (1)

a: After the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse, which turns off 400 scanner
motor pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on.
b: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates forward, which turns off 160 scanner motor pulses after the
scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.
c: Lighting of the exposure lamp is confirmed, the AGC is performed and shading is corrected.
d: The scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse for 412 scanner motor pulses, at the end of which the scanner stops at
the scanning start position for the original on the contact glass.
2-1-7
2A1/2
MSW
DFCHSOL
Lamp-on confirmation, AGC, and shading
412 P
Fwd.rotation
600 P
SM
Rev.rotation
160 P
35 ms
35 ms
EL
400 P
400 P
SHPSW
When the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) is on at power-on
Timing chart 2-1-6 Scanner operation (2)

a: When the main switch (MSW) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) rotates forward, which turns off 400 scanner motor
pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.
b: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates in reverse, which turns off 400 scanner motor pulses after the
scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on.
c: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates forward, which turns off 160 scanner motor pulses after the
scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.
d: Lighting of the exposure lamp is confirmed, the AGC is performed, and shading is corrected.
e: The scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse for 412 scanner motor pulses, at the end of which the scanner stops at
the scanning start position for the original on the contact glass.
2-1-8
2A1/2
(2) Image printing
The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as image
printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a
latent image on the drum surface.
9
8
4
5
6
Figure 2-1-7 Laser scanner unit (1)
1 Laser diode PCB (LDPCB)

2 Laser diode
3 Collimator lens
4 Cylindrical lens
5 Polygon mirror
6 Polygon motor (PM)
7 f lens
8 BD sensor mirror
9 BD sensor
2-1-9
2A1/2
Drum
1
2
3
5
4
Figure 2-1-8 Laser scanner unit (2)

1
2
3
4
Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.
Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam.
Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.
Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 25984 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam
toward the drum for one main-direction scan.
5 F lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter
constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam
is on the drum surface.
6 BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal.
7 BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to
provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-9.
Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is
provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.
The static latent image of the letter A, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-10. Electrical
charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.
The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.
Main scanning direction
+25
8015
m
Auxilary scanning direction
75+20
-10 m
:laser beam is on
Figure 2-1-9
2-1-10
Figure 2-1-10
2A1/2
2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container.
The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the
developing spirals that agitate the developer.
Toner container
Toner feed motor (TFM)
Developing unit
Figure 2-1-11 Developing section
Cleaning spiral
Waste toner tank
From
the toner
container
Left developing spiral
Right developing spiral

Flow of the toner
Figure 2-1-12 Flow of the toner
2-1-11
2A1/2
(1) Formation of magnetic brush
The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller around
the magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of
the magnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on the
magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.
A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing roller
to provide image contrast.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Developing unit housing

Developing roller
Toner sensor (TNS)
Doctor blade
Right developing spiral
Left developing spiral
Developing paddle
1
A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller: 0.6+0.1
0.05 mm
S1
N1
N1: 900 10-4 50 10-4 T

N2: 640 10-4 50 10-4 T
S1: 590 10-4 50 10-4 T
S2: 485 10-4 50 10-4 T
S3: 605 10-4 50 10-4 T
68.2
92
N2
60
S2
69.3
S3
Figure 2-1-13 Forming a magnetic brush
HVTPCB
CN1-1
CN1-6
DB
CN1-7
MPCB
24 V DC
DB REM
DB CONT
CN6-15
CN6-10
CN6-9
Developing roller
TNS SIG
TNS CONT
TFM
CN2-2
CN2-4
CN2-6, 7
Figure 2-1-14 Developing section block diagram
2-1-12
2A1/2
(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensor
The toner sensor (TNS) detects the toner density. As the developer passes by the sensor section of the toner sensor, the
toner sensor detects the ratio of toner to carrier in the developer and converts it into a voltage. When more toner is used,
the ratio of toner to carrier decreases and the toner sensor output voltage increases. When the ratio drops below the
specified value, the increase in toner sensor output voltage triggers toner replenishing. When toner is added and the ratio
of toner to carrier returns to normal, the toner sensor output voltage drops to the point where toner replenishing stops.
(3) Toner density control
Toner request message
Toner being replenished message (Toner container and
waste toner tank to be replaced.)
(forced toner feed)
Toner sensor
output voltage (V)
180 s
Toner empty
detection level (3.2V)

(2.2V)
ab
e f
Copying
Figure 2-1-15 Toner density control

a: If the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner feed start level 15 s after the drive motor (DM) has turned on
(end of toner empty detection inhibit time), the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.
b: As toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level and
replenishing stops.
c: When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level after toner replenishing is carried out,
the toner being replenished message appears disabling copying and forced toner feed starts. If the toner sensor
output voltage fails to fall to the toner feed stop level within 180 s of the start of forced toner feed, the toner request
message appears.
d: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level and
replenishing stops. After 60 s aging (15 s while copying) the toner being replenished message disappears and
copying is enabled.
e: After replacing the toner container and the waste toner tank, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.
f: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops to the toner feed stop level. The toner
being replenished message disappears and replenishing stops.
2-1-13
2A1/2
(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltage
The toner sensor control voltage is corrected based on the absolute humidity and the total drive motor time so that the
toner density is kept constant regardless of the changes in humidity and the total drive motor time.
Toner sensor control voltage after correction = A + B + C
A: Toner sensor control voltage before correction (value set by maintenance item U131)
B: Correction data based on the absolute humidity
C: Correction data based on the total drive motor time
Correction based on the absolute humidity
Correction data
d
+8
b
0
a
-5
12
91
321
Absolute humidity (g/m3)
Figure 2-1-16 Correction based on the absolute humidity

a: When the absolute humidity is between 0 and 12 g/m3, the correction data becomes a constant value of 5, which
decreases the toner sensor control voltage.
b: When the absolute humidity is between 12 and 91 g/m3, the correction data is increased according to the rise in
absolute humidity.
c: When the absolute humidity is 91 g/m3, the correction data becomes 0.
d: When the absolute humidity is between 91 and 321 g/m3, the correction data is increased according to the rise in
absolute humidity, which increases the toner sensor control voltage.
e: When the absolute humidity exceeds 321 g/m3, the correction data becomes a constant value of +8, which increases
the toner sensor control voltage.
Computing the absolute humidity

The humidity sensor (HUMSENS) converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing element into a voltage
and sends it to the main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) computes the absolute humidity based on this HUMSENS
signal and the temperature (ETTH signal) detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH).
MPCB
HUMSPCB
ETTH
Humidity
sensing
element
ETTH
GND
CN9-1
CN9-2
HUMSENS CN9-3
HUMSENS
1
5 V DC
CN9-4
Figure 2-1-17 Absolute humidity computation block diagram
2-1-14
2A1/2
Correction based on the total drive motor time
The toner sensor control voltage is also corrected based on the total time the drive motor (DM) has been on from
execution of maintenance item U130, so that the toner sensor output voltage is regulated properly.
Correction data
X-5
X-10
X-15
X-30
300 500
800
1200
2000
3000
6000
7000
Drive time (min.)
X: Toner sensor control voltage for initial developer setting (the value set in U131 in bits)
Figure 2-1-18 Correction based on the total drive motor time

a: When maintenance item U130 is run for initial developer setting, the total drive motor time is cleared and the toner
sensor control voltage correction data becomes 0.
b: When the total drive motor time is between 300 and 500 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
increase in the total drive motor time.
c: When the total drive motor time is between 500 and 800 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
constant value of 5.
d: When the total drive motor time is between 800 and 1200 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
e: When the total drive motor time is between 1200 and 2000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
f: When the total drive motor time is between 2000 and 3000 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
g: When the total drive motor time is between 3000 and 6000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
h: When the total drive motor time is between 6000 and 7000 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
i: When the total drive motor time exceeds 7000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a constant
value of 30.
(5) Correcting toner sensor output voltage
The toner sensor output voltage is corrected according to the absolute humidity at power-on (the main switch turning on),
fixing temperature and accumulated drive time.
Toner sensor output voltage after correction = Toner sensor output voltage before correction Correction data at poweron
Correction data at power-on = A B
If A B 0, the correction data at power-on is 0
A: Correction data based on the absolute humidity and fixing temperature
B: Accumulated drive time from the main switch turning on (total drive motor on-time)
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50C/122F or below, correction data A is determined as follows:
Condition
The absolute humidity at the last main switch turning off
was 50 g/m3 or below and the absolute humidity at the
main switch turning on was 50 g/m3 or below.
Cases other than above.
Correction data A
+15
+50
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50C/122F or above, the value of correction data A applied
when the main switch was last turned off is used.
2-1-15
2A1/2
2-1-5 Transfer and separation section

The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer
charging minus. Toner adhered to the transfer roller is removed by the transfer cleaner.
Drum separation claws
Drum
Transfer roller
Transfer cleaner
Figure 2-1-19 Transfer and separation section
HVTPCB
CN1-1
Drum
CN1-8
TC
CN1-9
MPCB
24 V DC
TC REM
TC CONT
CN6-15
CN6-8
CN6-7
Transfer roller
Figure 2-1-20 Transfer and separation section block diagram
2-1-16
2A1/2
Start key
RSW
150 ms
RCL
a
TC REM
b
550 ms
215 ms
TC CNT
Timing chart 2-1-7 Operation of transfer

a: 215 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed, transfer charging (TC REM) starts.
b: 550 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.
2-1-17
2A1/2
2-1-6 Cleaning section

The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer
process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner tank.
The cleaning blade is equipped with a thrust mechanism to protect the blade and drum from scratches.
Cleaning spiral
Cleaning blade
Drum
Figure 2-1-21 Cleaning section
2-1-18
2A1/2
2-1-7 Charge erasing section

The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface.
Cleaning lamp (CL)
Drum
Figure 2-1-22 Charge erasing section
MPCB
CL
CL REM
CN3-6
Drum
Figure 2-1-23 Charge erasing section block diagram
2-1-19
2A1/2
2-1-8 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-25. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer
process, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by the fixing heater (FH). Pressure is applied
by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper.
When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by heat roller separation claws and is
ejected from the fixing section by the rotation of the eject pulley and roller.
1 Upper fixing housing

2 Lower fixing housing
3 Fixing guide
4 Heat roller
5 Press roller
6 Heat roller separation claw
7 Fixing heater (FH)
8 Fixing unit thermostat (FTS)
9 Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)
0 Eject switch (ESW)
! Feedshift guide
@ Eject roller
# Eject pulley
5
@
2
0
8
1
7
4
3
Figure 2-1-24 Fixing section
FTS
Figure 2-1-25 Fixing section block diagram
2-1-20
ESW
CN11-5
5 V DC
CN11-7
FTH
MPCB
CN11-8
CN1-9
FH REM
CN1-9
TB4
FTH
FH
TB3
ESW
Heat roller
PSPCB
2A1/2
MSW
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
180C/356F
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
125C/257F
Fixing temperature
c
70 ms
DM
20 s
d
DB REM
100 ms
Half speed
CFM
Timing chart 2-1-8 Operation of fixing section

a: When the fixing temperature reaches 125C/257F after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the copier enters
primary stabilization. The developing bias (DB REM) turns on and the cooling fan motor (CFM) rotates at half speed.
b: 70 ms after the primary stabilization starts, the drive motor (DM) turns on.
c: When the fixing temperature reaches 180C/356F, the copier enters secondary stabilization and the drive motor
(DM) turns off 20 s later.
d: 100 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns off, the developing bias (DB REM) turns off.
Fixing control temperature correction

During copying, the fixing control temperature is corrected based on the size of paper used and ambient temperature.
Ambient
temperature
Size of paper
10C/50F
20C/68F
30C/86F
A4R/81/2" 11"R
185C/365F 180C/356F 175C/347F
B5
175C/347F 170C/338F 165C/329F
A5R/51/2" 81/2"R 165C/329F 160C/320F 155C/311F
2-1-21
2A1/2
2-1-9 DF section
(1) SDF (15 cpm copier)
The DF consists of the components shown in Figure. It conveys the original across the DF contact glass in
synchronization with the copier scanning operation.
When an original is placed on the original table and the DF original detection switch turns on, the scanner motor (SM)
turns on to drive the DF to feed the original.
When the DF change solenoid (DFCHSOL) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) drive to the scanner is interrupted and the
scanner scans the original from the DF at a fixed position.
The scanned original is ejected onto the original holder by the DF eject roller and DF eject pulley.
Figure 2-1-26 SDF

1 DF original conveying roller
2 DF original conveying pulley
3 DF eject roller
4 DF eject pulley
5 Original table
6 Original scanning guide
7 Original holder
8 DF original detection switch (DFODSW)
9 DF timing switch (DFTSW)
0 DF change solenoid (DFCHSOL)
! DF contact glass
CN11-13
MPCB
CN11-10
DFTSW DFODSW
Figure 2-1-27 SDF block diagram
2-1-22
2A1/2
(2) ADF (18 cpm copier)
The DF consists of the components shown in Figure. It conveys the original across the DF contact glass in
synchronization with the copier scanning operation.
During primary original feed, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on and the DF forwarding pulley and DF original
conveying roller feed originals one by one. Each original is then conveyed to the upper and lower registration rollers by
the DF original feed pulley and DF separation pulley.
During secondary original feed, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on and the upper and lower registration rollers
convey the original onto the DF contact glass. The DF upper eject roller and DF lower eject roller then eject the original
to the original eject cover.
4 1 ^ 0
&
5
@
# %
Figure 2-1-28 ADF

0 Lift guide
! Original feed guide
@ Original conveying guide
# Original scanning guide
$ Upper eject guide
% Lower eject guide
^ DF original detection switch (DFODSW)
& DF timing switch (DFTSW)
* DF contact glass
OFM
CN14-1
CN14-6
DFODSW
CN11-13
DFTSW
CN11-10
1 DF forwarding pulley
2 DF original feed pulley
3 DF separation pulley
4 DF original conveying roller
5 DF upper registration roller
6 DF lower registration roller
7 DF upper eject roller
8 DF lower eject roller
9 Original table
MPCB
Figure 2-1-29 ADF block diagram
2-1-23
2A1/2
Start key
e
2000 ms
OFM
170 ms
DFTSW
3000 ms
c
1700 ms
SM
300 ms
100 ms
200 ms
Timing chart 2-1-9 Operation of ADF

a: Simultaneous to when the start key is turned on, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on to start primary original feed.
b: 170 ms after the leading edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) on, the original feed motor (OFM)
turns off.
c: 300 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the scanner motor (SM) turns on for 200 ms.
d: 100 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on to start secondary original
feed.
e: 2000 ms after the trailing edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) off, the original feed motor (OFM)
turns off.
f: 3000 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the scanner motor (SM) turns on for 1700 ms.
2-1-24
2A1/2
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PCBs
4
5
1
6
7
;;
10
Machine front
Figure 2-2-1
Machine inside
Machine rear
PCBs
1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices.
2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates 24 V DC, 12 V DC and 5 V DC; controls the fixing heater.
3. High-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) ... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for
transfer.
4. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.
5. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.
6. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
7. Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser light.
8. Humidity sensor PCB (HUMSPCB) ............. Detects absolute humidity.
9. Memory PCB* (MEMPCB) ........................... Reads and outputs the image.
10. ST drive motor PCB** (STDMPCB) ............. Controls the drawer drive motor in the optional drawer.
*: Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 18 cpm copier.
**: Optional.
2-2-1
2A1/2
(2) Switches and sensors
SDF (15 cpm)

10
9
9
10
7
13
;;
11
12
14
1
5
15
16
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.

2. Safety switch (SSW) .................................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover or paper conveying cover
is opened; resets paper jam detection.
3. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing and detects the presence
of paper in the drawer.
4. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.
5. Drawer detection switch (DDSW) ................ Detects the insertion of the drawer.
6. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the scanner in the home position.
7. DF open/close switch (DFOCSW) ............... Detects the opening and closing of the DF.
8. DF safety switch* (DFSSW) ......................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF original switchback cover is
opened; resets original jam detection.
9. DF original detection switch (DFODSW) ..... Detects the presence of original on the DF.
10. DF timing switch (DFTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
11. Toner sensor (TNS) ..................................... Detects the toner density in the developing section.
12. Humidity sensor (HUMSENS) ...................... Detects absolute humidity.
13. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
14. ST safety switch** (STSSW) ........................ Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover of the optional drawer is
opened.
15. ST feed switch** (STFSW) ........................... Detects a paper misfeed and the presence of paper in the optional
drawer.
16. ST drawer detection switch** (STDDSW) .... Detects the insertion of the optional drawer.
**: Optional.
2-2-2
2A1/2
(3) Motors
;;
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.

Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system.
Toner feed motor (TFM) ............................... Replenishes toner.
Cooling fan motor (CFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior.
Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.
Original feed motor* (OFM) ......................... Drives the DF.
ST feed motor** (STFM) .............................. Drives the paper feed system in the optional drawer.

**: Optional.
2-2-3
2A1/2
(4) Other electrical components
3
2
;;
1
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Paper feed clutch (PFCL) ............................ Primary paper feed from the drawer.
Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.
Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed.
Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.
Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.
Fixing heater (FH) ........................................ Heats the heat roller.
Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ........................ Prevents overheating in the fixing section.
DF change solenoid* (DFCHSOL) ............... Switches the scanner drive when the DF is used.
ST paper feed clutch** (STPFCL) ................ Primary paper feed from the optional drawer.

**: Optional.
2-2-4
2A1/2
2-3-1 Power source PCB

Power source PCB
Main
switch
D1
Rectifier
circuit
Noise
filter
circuit
T1
24 V DC
D6
24 V DC
output
circuit
IC1
C22, 24
+
AC input
Q1
C14
+
Zero-cross
detection circuit
Switching
regulator
circuit
C31
Overvoltage
detection circuit
GND
12 V DC
output circuit
IC2
5.1 V DC
output circuit
IC3
12 V DC
C30
GND
5.1 V DC
C33
GND
PC2
TR1
Relay
5.1 V DC
Fixing heater control circuit
PT1
Zero-cross
signal
PC1
Heater REM
5.1 V DC
Heater Common
Heater Live
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC, 5.1 V DC and 12
V DC. It includes a noise filter circuit, a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC output
circuit, a 12 V DC output circuit, a fixing heater control circuit and a zero-cross detection circuit.
The noise filter circuit consists mainly of a line filter and capacitors. It reduces external noise from the AC input and prevents
switching noise generated by the power source PCB from leaving the machine.
The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input that has passed through the noise filter circuit using the diode bridge D1.
The smoothing capacitor C14 smoothes out the pulsed current from the diode bridge.
The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q1 with the voltage induced in the controlling coil of the
transformer T1 to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1.
The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diode D6 and
smoothing capacitors C22 and C24, and outputs a stable 24 V DC by the function of the shunt regulator IC1. The output
status of the 24 V DC is fed back to the switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC2. Based on the feedback, the
switching control circuit changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q1 on/off in order to adjust the 24 V
DC.
The 5.1 V DC output circuit consists of a step-down chopper circuit that uses IC4 as the control IC. It outputs a stable 5.1 V
DC.
The 12 V DC output circuit converts the 24 V DC from the 24 V DC output circuit to a stable 12 V DC by means of the 4-pin
regulator IC2.
The zero-cross detection circuit determines the timing at which the fixing heater turns on and sends zero-cross signals to
the main PCB (MPCB).
The fixing heater control circuit is controlled by the fixing heater on signal from the main PCB (MPCB). The phototriac PT1
turns on when the fixing heater on signal goes low. When the phototriac PT1 is turned on, current flows through the triac
TR1 to turn the fixing heaters on.
2-3-1
C80
SF24V
SF24V
COIL24
COIL G
G
LUG3
J0506
C85
NPL
D80
C7
RY
TB4
H-COM
H-LIVE
TB3
LUG1
LIVE
TB1
C1
J1003A
C3
J1503A
L3
C11
J1004A
C83
C6
C81
Z1
C9
TB2
R1
J2503A
AC125V
AC250V
T3.15AL
F3
L2
J0505
AC250V
J1504A
5A
4
1
HS1
D3
D2
PC1
C50
R4
C8
TH1
C84
J0502
C13
R3
D81
R16
R43
J1003
R41
R49
C38
J0503
C89
R34
1
Q2
C18
R35
HS2
Q4
D4
J0504
J1001
R33
R28
R10
D5
R11
IC3
R36
J0501
R42
PT1
R17
R29
ZD1
J2003
C88
C14
J1501
R15
R14
J2002
R19
CN3
T6.3AL
J1502A
F1 AC250V 15A
C4
C2
L6
3
R9
R8
R12
E
B
D8
L81
C86
L1
R2
C12
R5
R6
F2
D1
R39
J1201
B
E
C35
C37
R37
R7
1
C15
J7501
R31
R30
C39
R40
D10
C17
PC2
R13
R22
L80
3
C36
D9
IC1
C31
R48
R46
C34
J2004
J2005
J2006
J2008
J1504
C26
C22
C21
L5 C33
J1502
C24
0
C30
L4
C27
R23
IC2
J2007
R24
R20
12
2A12805
2A12806 T1
R21
Q1
R26
J1004
C20
C19
C40
J1503
J7502
R18
G
SF24
SF24
NC
24V
D6
HS3
FB1
C16
J1002
R47
R44
R45
J1002A
TR1
R38
3 LUG2
C28
J2502A
10
C87
Q3
R32
R25
R27
J1501A
CN2
J2501A
ZD2
ZD3
Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram
TR2
5
1
J1001A
J2009
J2001
24 SF24
G
G
G
G
2-3-2
CN1 ZC REM 12 5
C82
2A1/2
2A1/2
Terminals (CN)
TB-1
TB-2
TB-1
TB-2
TB-3
TB-4
TB-3
TB-4
1-1
1-3
1-2
1-4
1-7
1-5
1-8
1-6
1-9
1-5
1-10
1-5
2-1
2-5
2-3
2-5
Voltage
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
24 V DC SF
24 V DC
5.1 V DC
12 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
Remarks
120 V AC supply, input
220-240 V AC supply, input
120 V AC supply for FH, output
220-240 V AC supply for FH, output
24 V DC supply for MPCB, output (when SSW is on)
24 V DC supply for MPCB, output
5.1 V DC supply for MPCB, output
12 V DC supply for MPCB, output
FH on/off, input
Zero-cross signal, output
24 V DC supply for SSW, output
SSW on/off, input
2-3-3
2A1/2
2-3-2 Main PCB

Main PCB
Clock signal
Analog image data
ADC
(IC43)
S/H IC
(IC41)
Print data
MIP
(IC21)
FEEPROM
(IC55)
ODD
CCD PCB
EVEN
BUF
LSU
Printer data
Printer controller*
Memory image data

Address bus
CPU
(IC11)
Memory PCB**
Data bus
SRAM
(IC12,14,15)
XIO
(IC31)
Control signal
output
SDF (15 cpm)

Driver
Detection signal input
ADF (18 cpm)

Optional drawer*
Operation unit PCB
Drive unit
Scanner unit
Control signal output
Driver
Imaging unit
Paper feed unit
Detection signal input
Fixing unit
High-voltage
transformer PCB
*: Optional.
**: Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 18 cpm copier.
Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram

The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC11. It communicates with the printer controller and controls the
memory PCB, image processing system and engine drive system.
The CPU IC11 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM IC12, IC15 and IC17 for work memory and backup memory. In
accordance with the control program in FEEPROM IC55, the CPU IC11 communicates with the printer controller via the
serial communication function in the CPU. The CPU IC11 also controls the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), which is for image input
control, and the LSU, which is for image output control, via the image processing ASIC MIP IC21, and drives the operation
section and machine, conveys paper and detects abnormalities via XIO IC31.
2-3-4
10
CN12
D54
F51
B
C
R557
R759 R782
R525
L73
R7108
Q75
EB
IC51
R
748
C728
C
R7110 Q74
L74
C
B
8 CN8
7
2
1
CN7
16
9
Q72
CN6
L76
L78
R730
L75
R726
R728
R727
R729
R7111
L79
14
15
2
1
R719
R718
R717
R712 R713
R75 R77
R74
L72
R76
12 R711
R710
11 R79
2
1
R617
R616
R66
R64
3 2 R471
L420
C432
R467
L418
C
C
D
43
B Q62 Q63 Q64 Q65 E
R68
R776
14
13
2
1
C
K
3
4
2
1
R773
R774
R775
D58
D59
CN3
D51
C
A
C
Q61
A
E
R58
R57
L719
L724
L724
C714
C511
L51
7
CN2
L52
C710
R7118
L727
L723
10
C79
Q71
IC32
R6131
18
17
C719
R7114
C69
CN4
R784
C720
R7106
R610
R6132
R618
CN5
R612
R468
R469
Q73
Q66
L71
L710
L711
L712
R62
D72
L33
C35
IC72
R768
R549
E Q55
L519
L
511
B
IC52
14
E
11
10
IC55
L32
14
D56
c
L522
L521
L520
R786
R341
D55
D52
E
Q53
D57
B
14
D71
14
8
16
7
8
CN13
C816
L86
16
R337
R336
R335
IC31
R325
C721
R7116
C37
C38
6R758R533
5
L713
L85
BE C B IC71
8
IC61
R346
R345
R343
R376
R378
R377
R367
R366
R365
R364
R363
R353
R352
R350
R349
R348
R347
L35
R373
R375
R374
R372
R371
R370
R369
R368
R362
R361
R360
R359
R358
R357
R356
R355
R354
R344
R382
R383
C39
C310
C36
109
108
73
IC11
1
100
8
20
7 IC45
L23
C25
14
8
30
L11 C15
C11
C12
C13
C14
C16
IC54
14 a20
a19
IC56
b20
b19
IC53
7
C24
R24
REV:3
2A22803
7
L12
31
C53
72
R113
R112
R380
R111
R534
R324
R116
R114
L53
144
R124
R122
R120
81
RA12 RA13 RA14 RA15 RA16 RA113
RA11
RA17 5
25 L14
RA18
RA
8
19
RA
110
5
RA 4
118
5
RA
117
C726
RA114
15
28
15
38
C116 RA
C117 116
RA111 RA
RA111 115 4
14
IC14
14
IC 12
R797
R792
R791
C55
C54
C31 1
36
R136
R134
R135
R132 R379
R118
C729
2
4
C815
C810
C89
L82
L514
R524
R538
18
17
L59 CN11
1 CN9 R749
C32
R384
R129
R127
R125
R548
Q56
Q57
ECB
TP62
C215
C212
C213
IC21
C83
R170
R131
R130
D53
CN20
TP61
TP45
TP46
53
52
C84
R137
C111
C110
L
56
R527
C86 L83 R526
L88
3
C85
R155
R159
R157
C82 L81
C81
L31
L34
C33
C34
R385
L54
R517 R528
R763
37
X11
51
50
C
E
IC 15
R179
L13
C114
C115
C18
R144
R150
R152
R154
C822
80
Q11
28
R
177
R
178
C118
C17
IC13 8
C19
R168
L89
8 9 R553 R555
R556 R552
L524
R554
14
CN15
L613
C812
C811
R381
C817
L16
Q12
BT11
C27
X21
X22
2A12801
b1
a2
a1
L61
C23
C22
L21
R551
L810
C819
C26
208
C210
C211
R271
R270 L24
R269
R268
CN14
C214
C217
C216
C523
L22
R26
C524
C522
R6133
L28
R233
R232
R231
R230
R229
L27
L26 L44
C427
C426
C425
C424
L43
R
429
156
C28
C122
a2
a1
Q54
B C E
5
b1
b2
C824
L612
157
Q67
L812
R171
4
R172
R6109
R6110
R6134
R6111
C611
R261
R272
R7121
R7120
R7119
C818
R254
R255
L29
IC17
D12 A
D13 A
L811 C821
C820
K R173
R439
R440
R430 TP47
C
415
C120
C512
IC57
24
X24
X23
C823
R174
IC43
105
C219
C220
C221
Q51
L48
B
E
R417
C47
20
R436
R437
R438
Q45
C48 C
36
C414
25
R243
R245
C222
104
R246
IC41
R244
R242
13
R241
R239
L29
R6135
R222
R223
L25
R273
CN 19
C422
C
423
R175
58
C C Q13
11
12
16
R176
C121
LA63
E B
E B
IC42
13
C421
C420
24
10
L55
C119
L45
L421
R
420
TP
44
L42
R516
C518
R251
R248
R250
R665
R664
R663
L210
R247
R249
R264
R267
R682
R672
R674
R671
R670
R668
R667
L63
L610
L46
6
5
L47
R679
R675
R678
R673
R677
R669
24
12
R448
L413
L414
L415
R453
L412
R457
L64
L41
C412
L66
L65
R691
D11
C
EB Q 44
C
416
L611
R696
b2
R47
E
C413
C410
R683
R685
R694
L68
C46
R410
43
TP
C44
R240
K
R447
D42
IC44
F125
b40
b39
a40
a39
C42
C49
C411
R662
C43
Q42
E
Q47
R446
14
L84
C45
37
L416
C41 TP41
48
B
DG
D41
C88
C87
C
Q43
B L410
L411
C430
Q41 B
L49
C Q46
R445
2
1
BE
CN16
Q52
E
TP48
C147
CN17
TP42
11
CN18
C428
C429
2A1/2
R767
CN1
Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-5
2A1/2
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-3
1-2
1-4
1-7
1-5
1-8
1-6
1-9
1-5
1-10
1-5
2-2
1-6
2-3
3-2
2-4
1-6
2-6
3-2
2-7
3-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-2
3-4
3-10
3-5
3-10
3-6
3-2
3-7
3-2
3-8
3-2
3-9
3-2
3-11
3-10
3-13
3-12
3-14
3-12
4-1
4-18
4-2
4-18
4-3
4-18
4-4
4-18
4-5
4-18
4-6
4-18
4-7
4-18
4-8
4-18
4-9
4-18
4-10
4-18
4-11
4-18
4-12
4-18
4-13
4-18
4-14
4-18
4-15
4-18
4-16
4-18
5-2
5-10
5-3
5-10
5-4
5-10
5-5
5-10
5-6
5-10
5-7
5-11
5-8
5-11
5-9
5-10
5-12
5-11
6-1
6-14
6-2
6-14
6-3
6-14
6-4
6-14
6-5
6-14
6-6
6-14
6-7
1-6
6-8
6-14
6-9
1-6
*: Optional.
2-3-6
Voltage
24 V DC SF
24 V DC
5.1 V DC
12 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0 - 14 V DC
24 V DC
0 - 5 V DC
24/0 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC SF
24/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC SF
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
0 - 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 - 5 V DC
Remarks
24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input (when SSW is on)
24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
5.1 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
12 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
FH on/off, output
Zero-cross signal, input
TNS control voltage, output
24 V DC supply for TNS, output
TNS detection voltage, input
TFM drive control signal (+), output
TFM drive control signal (), output
24 V DC supply for PM, output
PM on/off, output
MSYNC signal, output
PM drive clock pulse, output
CL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for CL, output
MSW on/off, input
24 V DC supply for MSW, output
DDSW on/off, input
RSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for RSW, output
OPCB SEG0 signal, output
OPCB DIG0 signal, output
OPCB KEY0 signal, input
OPCB KEY1 signal, input
STFSW* on/off, input
STDDSW* on/off, input
STSSW* on/off, input
Optional drawer* set signal, input
STFM* drive clock pulse, output
STFM* on/off, output
STPFCL* on/off, output
5 V DC supply for optional drawer*, output
24 V DC supply for optional drawer*, output
BYPPFCL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL, output
24 V DC supply for PFCL, output
PFCL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for RCL, output
RCL on/off, output
Transfer charging control voltage, output
Transfer charging on/off, output
Developing bias control voltage, output
2A1/2
Terminals (CN)
6-10
6-14
6-11
6-14
6-12
1-6
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-14
9-1
1-6
9-3
1-6
9-4
9-2
11-2
11-1
11-3
11-1
11-5
11-4
11-6
11-4
11-7
11-4
11-8
1-6
11-10
11-9
11-11
11-9
11-13
11-12
11-14
11-12
11-16
11-15
11-18
11-17
12-1
12-5
12-2
12-5
12-3
12-5
12-4
12-5
13-1
13-2
13-4
13-3
13-5
13-2
14-1
13-2
14-2
13-2
14-3
13-2
14-4
13-2
14-5
13-2
14-6
13-2
14-7
13-2
14-9
13-2
15-1
13-2
15-2
13-2
15-3
13-2
15-4
13-2
15-5
13-2
15-6
13-2
15-6
13-2
15-7
13-2
15-10
13-2
15-11
13-2
15-12
13-2
15-13
13-2
15-14
13-2
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-9
16-10
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 - 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC SF
0 - 5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
0 - 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC SF
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC
24 V DC SF
24 V DC SF
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
12 V DC
Remarks
Developing bias on/off, output
Main charging ALM signal, input
GRID control voltage, output
Main charging on/off, output
24 V DC supply for HVTPCB, output
ETTH detection voltage, input
HUMSENS detection voltage, input
5 V DC supply for HUMSPCB, output
SHPSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for HUMSPCB, output
ESW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for ESW, output
5 V DC supply for FTH, output
FTH detection voltage, input
DFTSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for DFTSW, output
DFODSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for DFODSW, output
SDF set signal, input
ADF set signal, input
EL on/off, output
EL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
24 V DC supply for DM, output
DM drive clock pulse, output
DM on/off, output
24 V DC supply for OFM*, output
24 V DC supply for OFM*, output
OFM* coil energization pulse, output (A)
OFM* coil energization pulse, output (B)
OFM* coil energization pulse, output (_A)
OFM* coil energization pulse, output (_B)
24 V DC supply for DFSSW*, output
DFSSW* on/off, input
SM coil energization pulse, output (_A)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (A)
SM coil energization pulse, output (B)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (_B)
DFCHSOL** on/off, output
24 V DC supply for DFCHSOL**, output
DFOCSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for DFOCSW, output
CFM on/off, output
CFM half speed/full speed, output
24 V DC supply for CFM, output
CCDPCB clock pulse, output
CCDPCB clock pulse, output
CCDPCB RESET signal, output
CCDPCB CLP signal, output
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, output
CCDPCB image signal (ODD), input
CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), input
12 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output
**: For the 15 cpm copier only.
2-3-7
2A1/2
Terminals (CN)
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-2
18-5
18-2
18-6
18-2
18-7
18-2
2-3-8
Voltage
0/5 V DC
5 V DC SF
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
LDPCB BD signal, input
5 V DC supply for LDPCB, output
LDPCB ENABLE signal, input
LDPCB VIDEO signal, input
LDPCB ADJUST signal, input
2A1/2
2-3-3 Operation PCB
key_sen[0]
CN2-2
key_sen[1]
CN2-1
_SCAN[0]
_SCAN[1]
_SCAN[2]
_SCAN[3]
_SCAN[4]
_SCAN[5]
_SCAN[6]
_SCAN[7]
CN1-3
CN1-2
CN1-1
CN2-7
CN2-6
CN2-5
CN2-4
CN2-3
_LEDON[0]
CN1-9
_LEDON[1]
CN1-8
_LEDON[2]
CN1-7
_LEDON[3]
CN1-6
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K14
K1
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
D2
_LEDON[4]
_LEDON[5]
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
a1
b1
c1
d1
e1
f1
g1
DP1
a2
b2
c2
d2
e2
f2
g2
DP2
a3
b3
c3
d3
e3
f3
g3
DP3
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
L12
L13
L14-1
L15
L16
L17
L18
L19
L20
L21
L14-3
D8
CN1-5
CN1-4
Figure 2-3-5 Operation unit PCB block diagram

The operation unit PCB (OPCB) consists of key switches and LEDs. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan signals
(SCAN [0] to SCAN [7]) and LED lighting selection signals (LEDON [0] to LEDON [5]) from the main PCB (MPCB). The key
switches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN [0] to SCAN [7]) and the return signals (key sen [0], [1]).
As an example, to light a1, the LED lighting selection signal (LEDON [0]) should be driven low in synchronization with a
low level on the scan signal (SCAN [7]). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations.
As another example, if K2 is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal
(SCAN [6]) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (key sen [0]). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the position
where the line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which key
switch was operated.
2-3-9
2A1/2
2A1/2-2
K4
K6
K8
K10
JP11
JP10
JP15
K7
Figure 2-3-6 Operation unit PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-10
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
CN1
K11
K12
Remarks
OPCB KEY1 signal, output
OPCB KEY0 signal, output
OPCB DIG7 signal, input
OPCB SEG5 signal, input
JP28
JP34
JP35
JP27
JP25
D7
D8
Terminals (CN)
2-1
4-18
2-2
4-18
2-3
4-18
2-4
4-18
2-5
4-18
2-6
4-18
2-7
4-18
1-1
4-18
1-2
4-18
1-3
4-18
1-4
4-18
1-5
4-18
1-6
4-18
1-7
4-18
1-8
4-18
1-9
4-18
L20
CN2
JP27
JP23
JP24
JP38
JP14
JP13
JP9
K9
JP36
D6
L18
TH
JP42
L6
L19
JP26
L17
L13
14
JP37
L5
1 LED
JP30
JP41
L4
JP8
L16
D5
D4
K3
JP21
JP31
JP32
JP33
K5
JP4
JP5
JP6
L10
K2
JP29
JP19
L3
K1
15
K13
JP40
L1
28
JP3
L21
K14
JP39
L9
D3
L11
L14
R1
2
G3
JP20
L15
JP7
JP2
L12
L8
JP1
D2
L2
JP16
JP12
JP17
JP18
L7
2A12807
REV:2
2A1/2
2-3-4 CCD PCB

CCD PCB
Main PCB
1
2
CCD
IC2
Logic IC1
RESET
RESET
CLP
CLP
SHIFT
SHIFT
ODD
Transistor TR2
Clock signal generator

ASIC
ODD
Analog signal
processing circuit
EVEN
Transistor TR1
EVEN
Figure 2-3-7 CCD PCB block diagram
The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor IC2 for original scanning.
The CCD sensor IC2 is controlled by the clock signals 1, 2, RESET, CLP and SHIFT for CCD drive from the main PCB
(MPCB) via logic IC1.
Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals are
amplified by emitter followers in the transistors TR1 and TR2 and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in
the main PCB (MPCB).
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
12 V DC
Remarks
CCDPCB clock pulse, input
CCDPCB clock pulse, input
CCDPCB RESET signal, input
CCDPCB CLP signal, input
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, input
CCDPCB image signal (ODD), output
CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), output
12 V DC supply from MPCB, input
2-3-11
2A1/2
2-3-5 Laser diode PCB
Figure 2-3-8 Laser diode PCB block diagram
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) consists of the laser diode LD1 and laser driver IC1.
The laser driver IC1 on the laser diode PCB (LDPCB) turns the laser diode LD1 on and off according to the image data
received from the main PCB (MPCB). Upon detection of a laser beam from the laser diode LD1, the photo sensor PH1
outputs a horizontal sync signal (/BD) to the main PCB (MPCB).
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) adjusts the laser diode drive current (APC) for each line scanned outside the image area
when /ADJUST is low to keep the laser beam output constant.
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-2
1-5
1-2
1-6
1-2
1-7
1-2
2-3-12
Voltage
0/5 V DC
5 V DC SF
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
LCDPCB BD signal, input
5 V DC supply for LCDPCB, input
LCDPCB ENABLE signal, input
LCDPCB VIDEO signal, input
LCDPCB ADJUST signal, output
2A1/2
Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch turned on to machine stabilization
MSW On
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
180C/356F
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
125C/257F
Fixing temperature
70 ms
DM
CN13-5
DB REM
CN6-10
MC REM
CN6-13
DB CNT
CN6-9
CFM
CN15-12
OFM
CN143,4,5,6
450 ms
450 ms
450 ms
SM
CN151,3,4,6
40 ms
1500 ms
45 ms
EL
5500 ms
CN12-1,2
240 ms
280 ms
SHPSW
CN11-2
2-4-1
2A1/2
Timing chart No. 2 Copying an A4R/81/2" 11"R original onto a sheet of A4R/81/2" 11"R copy paper from the drawer, magnification ratio 100%
Start key On
PM
CN3-3
MSYNC
CN3-4
50 ms
20 4 ms
1000 ms
VIDEO
CN18-6
70 ms
DM
CN13-5
80 ms
100 ms
DB REM
CN6-10
MC REM
CN6-13
95 5 ms
95 5 ms
GRID CNT CN6-12

40 12 ms
DB CNT
CN6-9
60 ms
40 12 ms
120 ms
180 ms
90 ms
180 ms
TC REM
CN6-8
TC CNT
CN6-7
550 ms
150 ms
PFCL
CN6-4
215 ms
710 ms
RSW
CN3-13
160 ms
RCL
150 ms
1700 ms
CN6-6
700 ms
665 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN11-5
Trailing edge registration
PVSYNC
CN3-5
2-4-2
2A1/2
Timing chart No. 3 Continuous copying of an A4R/81/2" 11"R original onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" 11"R copy paper from the drawer, magnification ratio 100%
Start key On
PM
CN3-3
MSYNC
CN3-4
20 4 ms
50 ms
1000 ms
VIDEO
CN18-6
70 ms
DM
CN13-5
80 ms
100 ms
DB REM
CN6-10
MC REM
CN6-13
95 5 ms
95 5 ms
GRID CNT CN6-12

40 12 ms
DB CNT
CN6-9
60 ms
40 12 ms
120 ms
180 ms
90 ms
180 ms
TC REM
CN6-8
TC CNT
CN6-7
630 ms
150 ms
PFCL
CN6-4
260 ms
RSW
665 ms
CN3-13
160 ms
RCL
260 ms
200 ms
710 ms
150 ms
160 ms
1700 ms
CN6-6
150 ms
1700 ms
700 ms
300 ms
ESW
300 ms
CN11-5
PVSNC
CN3-5

2-4-3
2A1/2
Timing chart No. 4 Copying an A4R/81/2" 11"R original from the SDF onto a sheet of A4R/81/2" 11"R copy paper from the optional drawer, magnification ratio 100% (15 cpm copier)
DFODSW
CN11-13
PM
CN3-3
MSYNC
CN3-4
50 ms
20 4 ms
1000 ms
VIDEO
CN18-6
DM
CN13-5
DB REM
CN6-10
MC REM
CN6-13
70 ms
80 ms
100 ms
95 5 ms
95 5 ms
GRID CNT CN6-12

40 12 ms
DB CNT
CN6-9
50 ms
40 12 ms
120 ms
180 ms
90 ms
180 ms
TC REM
CN6-8
TC CNT
CN6-7
RSW
CN3-13
630 ms
260 ms
160 ms
RCL
260 ms
1700 ms
150 ms
CN6-6
665 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN11-5
PVSYNC
CN3-5
STFM
CN5-7
STPFCL
CN5-8

50 ms
150 ms
380 ms
STFSW
CN5-2
1200 ms
2-4-4
2A1/2
Timing chart No. 5 Continuous copying of an A4R/81/2" 11"R original from the ADF onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" 11"R copy paper from the bypass table, magnification ratio 100% (18 cpm copier)
Start key On
PM
CN3-3
MSYNC
CN3-4
50 ms
20 4 ms
1000 ms
VIDEO
CN18-6
DM
CN13-5
70 ms
80 ms
100 ms
DB REM
CN6-10
MC REM
CN6-13
95 5 ms
95 5 ms
GRID CNT CN6-12

40 12 ms
DB CNT
CN6-9
60 ms
40 12 ms
120 ms
180 ms
90 ms
180 ms
TC REM
CN6-8
TC CNT
CN6-7
630 ms
150 ms
BYPPFCL
CN6-1
260 ms
RSW
CN3-13
RCL
CN6-6
260 ms
200 ms
710 ms
665 ms
160 ms
150 ms
160 ms
1700 ms
150 ms
1700 ms
260 ms
300 ms
ESW
300 ms
CN11-5
PVSYNC
CN3-5
DFTSW
CN11-10

170 ms
2000 ms
OFM
SM
CN143,4,5,6
CN151,3,4,6
500 ms
3000 ms
300 ms
1700 ms
100 ms
200 ms
2-4-5
2-4-6
Adjusting magnification of
the scanner in the auxiliary
scanning direction
(scanning adjustment)
Adjusting magnification of
the scanner in the main
scanning direction
Adjusting the left and right

margins (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the trailing edge

margin (printing adjustment)
LSU illumination start timing
Adjusting the leading edge

margin (printing adjustment)
Registration clutch turning on timing

(secondary paper feed start timing)

registration (printing adjustment)
Original scanning speed
Data processing
LSU illumination start/end timing
LSU illumination end timing
Adjusting the LSU print start timing
Drive motor speed adjustment
Description
Adjusting the center line of

the bypass table (printing
adjustment)
Image
Item
Adjusting the magnification

in the auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment)
Adjusting
order
Chart of image adjustment procedures
U070
U065
U065
U402
U402
U402
U034
U034
U053
Exp.3 (lit)
Exp.1 (lit)
Exp.3 (lit)
Exp.5 (lit)
Exp.1 (lit)
Exp.3 (lit)
Exp.1 (lit)
Exp.1 (flashing)
Exp.1 (lit)
Item No. Copy exposure indicator
Maintenance mode
Test chart
Test chart
U402 test
pattern
U402 test
pattern
U402 test
pattern
U034 test
pattern
U034 test
pattern
U053 test
pattern
Original
1-6-49
1-6-28
1-6-27
1-6-15
1-6-15
1-6-15
1-6-12
1-6-14
1-4-11
Page
U065: For copying an original

placed on the contact glass.
U070: For copying originals
from the DF.
No adjustment for copying

using the DF.
Exp.1: Paper feed from the

drawer.
Exp.2: Paper feed from the
bypass tray
Remarks
2A1/2
Adjusting the original scan data (image

adjustment)

adjustment)

adjustment)

margin (scanning adjustment)
Adjusting the trailing edge

margin (scanning adjustment)
Adjusting the left and right

margins (scanning adjustment)
#
U404
U403
U404
U403
U404
U403
U071
U066
U072
U067
Left margin:
Exp.3 (lit)
Right margin:
Exp.5 (lit)
Exp.1 (flashing)
Exp.1 (flashing)
Exp.3 (lit)
Exp.3 (lit)
Item No. Copy exposure indicator
Maintenance mode
When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original
(P/N 2A168070), the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (U065)
Original scan start timing
Description

registration (scanning adjustment)
Image
adjustment)
Item
Adjusting the center line

Adjusting
order
Test chart
Test chart
Test chart
Test chart
Test chart
Original
1-6-53
1-6-31
1-6-53
1-6-31
1-6-53
1-6-31
1-6-50
1-6-29
1-6-52
1-6-30
Page

from the DF.

from the DF.

from the DF.

from the DF.

from the DF.
Remarks
2A1/2
2-4-7
2A1/2
Image quality
Item
100% magnification
Enlargement/reduction
Lateral squareness (copier mode)
Margins (copier mode)
Margins (printer mode)

Skewed paper feed (left-right difference)
Lateral image shifting
2-4-8
Specifications
Copier: 1.0% or less
Using DF: 1.5% or less
Copier: 1.5% or less
Using DF: 2.0% or less
Copier: 1.5 mm/200 mm or less
Using DF: 2.0 mm/200 mm or less
A: 3.0 2.5 mm (inch)
+3.5
3.0 2.5
mm (metric)
B: 3.0 2.5 mm
C: 3.0 2.5 mm (inch)
+3.5
3.0 2.5
mm (metric)
D: 3.0 2.5mm
A: 6.0 2.0 mm
B: 6.0 2.5 mm
C: 6.0 2.0 mm
D: 6.0 2.5 mm
Drawer: 2.5 mm or less
Bypass: 2.5 mm or less
Drawer: 2.0 mm/200 mm or less
Bypass: 2.0 mm/200 mm or less
Drawer: 2.0 mm or less
Bypass: 3.0 mm or less
A
OFM
B
ADF
C
D
CCDPCB
ESW
Dev.
bias
TNS
C
MEMORY
16M
SDF
TFM
SDF (15 cpm)

ADF (18 cpm)
G
NETWORK
BOAD
(OPTION)
Wire color
Black
Brown
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Pink
Red
Orange
Light blue
Purple
Gray
6 6 PG
PRINTER BOAD
(OPTION)
6 6
(CN7)
1 1 EL
2 2 EL
3
4
D
INPCB
4
3
2 2 PK
1 1
VIDEO
SG
5 V SF
SG
BD
1 1
2 2
1 1
8 8
CN2
SG
1 3
2 2
1
1 1
8 8 YW
BE
6
3 3
CL
SG
RSW
5V
2 1 BK
1 2 RD
HUMS
1 1
2
(CN2)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 14 YW
5 5
4
3 3
STSSW
24 V
MSW
24 V
SG
24 V SF 1 1 GY
YW
PG
3
PM
2
1 1
STFSW
11
(CN20)
2
3
4
5
A20
B20
13
14
15
16
17
18 18
DIG6
DIG7
KEY0
KEY1
Rth
GND
DIG4
DIG2
1
2
MEMPCB
(15 cpm: OPTION)
A30
B30
(CN19)
A1
B1
COM
NO
36
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
DIG0
GY
A1
B1
1
2
SEG0
SEG1
4 4
2 2
1 1
4 4
NO
COM
80
(CN17)
WE
11
12
FTS
PG
WE
(CN16)
5V
TR
5 NC
6 TFM
TFM
24V
9
8
7
6
9
8
7
6
1 BK
2
3
4
4
5
BK TB1
FDSET
1
2
3
4
3
LB 4
12 12
11 11
WE
BK 1 1
BK 2 2
LB
GY
HEATER-COM
1
2
WE
BK
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
HEATER-LIVE
1 SG
6 6
(CN11)
1 1
1
2 2
TC
TB4
(CN2)
TH
SG
HUM
5V
DM
GRID
TB3
13
PG
24 V SF 15 15
MC
RCL
2
1
YW
9 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
21
12
(CN1)
PFCL
DFOCSW
6
7
8
9
10
CFM
12
HEATER
CIRCUIT
2
3
4
5
(CN3)
12
8 1
4
5
6
7
PRY
24 V
24 V
PFCL
24 V
RCL
TC CNT
1
BYPPFCL
1
2
1 2
CCD CLK
3
4
DM REM 5 5
NC
6 6
WE
9
7 GN
1
BK 1 2
BK 2 1
SG
5
4
3
2
1 1
A
B
FTH
24 V SF 1
PSPCB
1
2
3
YW 18 18 ADF SET
NOISE
FILTER
8 3
BK
SHPSW
4
5
6
7
WE TB2
PG
SG
AG
5 V DC
6 5
10
9
8
7
MSW
GY
1
2
3
4
RD
1
2
3
2
1
BE
PK
SM
7 7
8 8
WE
NC
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
GN/YW
BK
24 V
5V
PG
13
14
3
3
24 V
BE
BK
RD
11
NEUTRAL
L
5V
24 V
SG
1 1 PK
33
4
1 2
GN 1 1 SG
6
7
8
9
_B
9 9 24 V SF
_
_
SM B
1
2
3
4
5
SM_A
24 V
LIVE
9 1
6
GY 1 1
24 V SF
LB
1 9
11
DFTSW
7
RD
RD
YW
GN
WE
PK
RD
COM
NO
DFSSW
1 1
Wiring diagram
2A1/2-2
I
J
WE
SSW
FH
FEEDER
(OPTION)
STFM
STPFCL
LSU
OPCB
DDSW
RSW
BA
(CN9)
1 1
3 3
4 4
MPCB
(CN12)
WE
EL
Mark
BK
BN
YW
GN
BE
WE
PK
RD
OE
LB
PE
GY
2-4-9
KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.

Headquarters:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-6000
New York Show Room:
149 West 51st street,
New York, NY 10019
TEL : (212) 554-2679
FAX : (212) 554-2625
Northeastern Region:
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-4401
Midwestern Region:
201 Hansen Court Suite 119
Wood Dale, Illinois 60191
TEL : (630) 238-9982
FAX : (630) 238-9487
Western Region:
14101 Alton Parkway,
P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,
California 92618-7006
TEL : (949) 457-9000
FAX : (949) 457-9119
Southeastern Region:
1500 Oakbrook Drive,
Norcross, Georgia 30093
TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (770) 729-9873
Southwestern Region:
2825 West Story Road,
Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (972) 570-4704
Dallas Parts Distribution Center
& National Training Center:
TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.

6120 Kestrel Road,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.

Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Ins,
Delegacin Azcapotzalco
Mxico, D.F. C.P. 02130
TEL : 3-83-27-41
FAX : 3-83-78-04
2000 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation
is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
Printed in U.S.A.
KM-1510/1810
Includes: ST-13
Printing System (M)
PARTS LIST
Published in Jan.01
2A170770
NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order.
eg.
Parts Number
Parts Name
Machine Model
Cycle
Quantity
2A104012
FRONT COVER
1510
60Hz
2A204012
FRONT COVER
1810
60Hz
2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately.

3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column.
Parts with "'" indicates the service parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied.
Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them.
eg.
Parts Number
Parts Name
Parts Number
Parts Name
2A168041
LSU ASS'Y
2A105131
LABEL, LASER UNIT
2A113010
UNIT, LSU
Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.
eg.
Parts Number
Parts Name
Parts Number
Parts Name
2A201010
MEMORY PCB ASS'Y (1510)
2A226010
MOUNT, MEMORY BOARD (1510)
2A228010
MEMORY PCB (1510)
4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.
Parts List
KM-1510/1810
CONTENTS
FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS
FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT(DEVELOPING)
20
FIG. 2 FRAMES
FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT(CLEANING)
22
FIG. 3 CASSETTE
FIG. 12 FIXING SECTION
24
FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION
FIG. 13 DRIVING SECTION
26
FIG. 5 DOCUMENT FEEDER (1510)
10
FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
28
FIG. 6 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER I (1810)
12
FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT
30
FIG. 7 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER II (1810)
14
FIG. 16 ACCESSORIES & OPTION
32
FIG. 8 OPTICAL SECTION
16
FIG. 9 LASER SCANNER UNIT
18
INDEX
34
2A1/2A2
12
HCL
HCL
5
HCL
HCL
HAT
HCL
HAT
HDB
16
HAT
10
HCL
HCL
CIB
13
17
BHI
15
18
19
13
HDB
CIB
14
HDB
HAT
HDB
8
6
11
HDB
HDB
HAT

SP
Ref.
No.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Part. No.
2A104012
2A204012
2A104021
2A104032
2A104041
2A104071
2A204021
2A104080
2A104090
2A104100
2A104110
2A105091
2A105140
2A105160
49628105
2A118240
2A118250
2A005060
71804400
19512210
2A112700
2A1/2A2
Description
FRONT COVER (1510)

FRONT COVER (1810)
UPPER FRONT COVER
RIGHT COVER
LEFT COVER
REAR COVER (1510)
REAR COVER (1810)
COVER,DISPOSAL TANK
COVER,PRINTER BOARD
RIGHT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER
LEFT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER
LABEL,CONVEYING JAM
LABEL,CARTRIDGE OPERATION
LABEL,DF CAUTION (1510)
RECEIVER,MAGNET
DETECTION PLATE,DISPOSAL TANK
SPRING,TANK DETECTION
LABEL,HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION(EUR)
MAGNET,LOWER FRONT COVER
RETAINING PIN,MIRROR FRAME
RETAINING PIN A,MIRROR FRAME
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the

assembly appearing immediately above them.
Parts with "'" indicates the Service parts.
Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with ""
appearing immediately above them.
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
FIG. 2 FRAMES
2A1/2A2
HBH
48
HAU
HAO
35
25
22
35
21
HAU
HDB
37
HAU
44
34
30
39
33
42
32
43
29
47
45
24
31
56
19
38
28
14
HAU
HAU
48
13
48
36
53
1
5
HAU
HBH
51
23
54
HAU
55
26
HDG
E05
46
HAU
15
27
40
KAK
HAQ
40
17
16
HAQ
10
11
HDG
20
40
16
BBK
HAQ
18 BBK
12
50
49
46
HAQ
BHI
18
BHI
41
BHI
41
BBK
6
52
40
HDB
HDB
HDB
HAQ
HDB
HAQ
HDB
FIG. 2 FRAMES
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Part. No.
2A102010
2A102021
2A102030
2A102090
2A806250
2A107040
J7330120
68720160
67322230
2A106010
2A106031
2A106040
2A106071
2A106081
2A106160
2A106170
2A106180
2A106191
2A106200
2A106220
2A106510
2A106530
2A106540
2A106550
2A106560
2A106570
2A106581
2A106590
2A106680
2A106690
2A106700
2A106721
2A106730
2A110150
2A121020
2A121050
2A121060
2A126090
2A127010
65902670
2A1/2A2
Description
BASE
FRAME IMAGE FORMATION
RIGHT FRAME
LEFT RAIL,CASSETTE
RING STOPPER
SLIDER,CASSETTE
PLUG,9715B-12A(IRS)
PULLEY,FEED SHIFT
BUSHING 8
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
RIGHT ROLLER,REGISTRATION
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
ACTUATOR,REGISTRATION
SPRING,REGISTRATION ACTUATOR
RIGHT GEAR 15,REGISTRATION
PULLEY B,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED CL
SUPPORT PLATE,GUIDE PULLEY
RIGHT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION
GUIDE FILM,PAPER FEED CONFLUENCE
PULLEY,BYPASS
UPPER GUIDE,BYPASS
GUIDE,BYPASS LIFT
HOLDER,BYPASS PAD
CAM,BYPASS LIFT
STOPPER,BYPASS LIFT
SPRING,BYPASS LIFT
SPRING,BYPASS PAD
PAD,BYPASS
SHAFT,BYPASS
GROUND PLATE,BYPASS LIFT
GUIDE,BYPASS PAD
FRONT BUSHING,BYPASS
LIGHT SHIELD,CLEANING LAMP
PLATE SPRING,EJECT
STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT
GROUND PLATE,EJECT
GROUND PLATE,IMAGE FORMATION
LAMP,CLEANING
CUSHION RUBBER
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'

Ref.
No.
Part. No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
34907290
2A127890
2A127900
2A127910
2AV27340
2A806030
34806150
34806480
34906150
34906160
2A106760
2A106230
2A106740
2A114340
2A106240
2A106770
Description
PULLEY,GUIDE
TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER JUNCTION
TERMINAL,GRID JUNCTION
TERMINAL,TRANSFER JUNCTION
CLUTCH,BYPASS
BUSH FEED
STOPPER 5
STOPPER 6
INNER BUSHING,PAPER FEED
OUTER BUSHING,PAPER FEED
FRICTION PLATE C,BYPASS LIFT
GUIDE FILM,PRIMARY PAPER FEED
VIBRATION INSULATOR,PAD HOLDER
HOLDER,DEVELOPING
FRONT SHEET,REGISTRATION
SHEET,PAD HOLDER
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FIG. 3 CASSETTE
2A1/2A2
19
7
12
11
14
HDC
WAD
16
10
17
14
8
18
13
15
9
HAT
FIG. 3 CASSETTE
SP
Ref.
No.
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
'
'
'
'
'
'
2A1/2A2
Part. No.
Description
2A107011
2A107020
2A107030
2A107050
76508130
19507011
19507040
19507050
19507080
34907021
34907031
34907050
34907060
34907070
34907131
34907141
34907330
68802070
2A107060
COVER,CASSETTE
GROUND PLATE,CASSETTE
SPRING,CASSETTE
FRONT CLAW CASSETTE
SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER
CASSETTE,PAPER FEED
BASE,CASSETTE
LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE
REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC)
FRONT CURSOR,CASSETTE
REAR CURSOR,CASSETTE
REAR CLAW,CASSETTE
LEVER,CURSOR RETAINING
PIN,CLAW CASSETTE
REAR STOPPER,PAPER
GEAR 18,CASSETTE
LABEL,PAPER UPPER LIMIT
SPRING A,LIFT UP
FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2

Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
33
30
34
35
4
KAK
29
38
31
33
36
37
34
30
17
32
HDB
27
11
HDB
HBH
21
HDB
24
28
16
HDB
23
26
25
HDB
HDB
HDB
10
HDB
E05
25
20
15
23
25
7
13
19
9
24
HDB
12
19
18
1
HBH
16
HDB
22
HBH
8
KAK
14

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
29
30
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
2A102100
2A102110
2A104052
2A105080
2A106020
2A106060
2A106120
2A106150
2A106210
2A106810
2A106820
2A106831
2A106841
2A116171
2A806720
35904270
2A116050
2A116060
2A116070
2A116080
2A116090
2A116100
2A116111
2A116121
2A116130
2A116140
2A116150
2A116160
2A168034
2A168064
2AR17080
2A116010
2A116200
2A116020
2A116040
2A116180
2A116190
2A116210
2A116220
2A116240
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
2A1/2A2
Description
HANDLE,JAM RELEASE
FULCRUM PIN,CONVEYING
COVER,CONVEYING
LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION
LEFT ROLLER,REGISTRATION
SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING
FRONT SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING
LEFT GEAR 14,REGISTRATION
LEFT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION
TABLE,BYPASS
COVER,BYPASS TABLE
FRONT CURSOR,BYPASS
REAR CURSOR,BYPASS
STATIC ELIMINATOR,TRANSFER
GEAR MPF
HOOK,CONVEYING HANDLE
REAR GUIDE TRANSFER
HOUSING,CONVEYING
SPRING,CONVEYING PRESSURE
FRONT SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER
REAR SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER
SHAFT,HOOK
FRONT BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE
REAR BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE
HOLDER,PRESSURE SPRING
TERMINAL,TRANSFER GUIDE
HOLDER,TRANSFER PRESSURE SPRING
SPRING,CONVEYING RELEASE
TRANSFER ROLLER ASSY
TRANSFER ROLLER ASSY(METRIC)
COLLAR,TRANSFER ROLLER
ROLLER,TRANSFER
ROLLER,TRANSFER,METRIC
FRONT GUIDE,TRANSFER
PULLEY,TRANSFER
BUSHING,TRANSFER
GEAR,TRANSFER
FRONT SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE
CLEANER,TRANSFER
SEAL B,TRANSFER ROLLER
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
22
1
14
5
3
14
25
15
21
31
32
13
30
HAO
31
32
12
18
33
31
10
31
HAO
28
11
HAO
24
17
32
19
26
29
6
30
10
20
HAO
HCJ
9
18
11
16
23
31
27
19
32
10

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
3BP11070
3BP11080
3BP11090
3BP11100
3BP11110
3BP11120
3BP11130
3BP11140
3BP11150
3BP11160
3BP11170
3BP11180
3BP11190
3BP11220
3BP11230
3BP11240
3BP11250
3BP11270
3BP11280
3BP11290
3BP11300
3BP11310
3BP11320
3BP11330
2A127050
48129208
3A722090
3BR22040
34806140
34917170
65016080
66006840
M2105020
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
COVER,ADF
HOUSING,CONVEYING
GUIDE,ORIGINAL
ROLLER,CONVEYING
ROLLER,EJECT
MOUNT,DRIVE
GEAR 25/19
SPRING,CONVEYING
MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER
UPPER HINGE
LOWER HINGE
ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION
ACTUATOR,TIMING DETECTION
SPRING,ORIGINAL GUIDE
WIRE,ADF
FRONT FILM,CONVEYING
REAR FILM,CONVEYING
SHAFT,HINGE
PULLEY 22,CONVEYING
GEAR 20,CONVEYING
SHEET,READING
TRAY,EJECT
MOUNT,PULLEY
RETAINER,TENSION
SWITCH,PHOT0 INTERRUPTOR
PIN,TENSION
PULLEY,DRIVE
BELT 192,CONVEYING
STOPPER 4
PULLEY,TRANSFER HOLDER
STOP RING E3
BUSHING 4
NYLON CLAMP 4N,NK-4N
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
5
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
5
4
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
5
4
1

11
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
34 38
12
30
32
39
25
33
22
14
31
13
11
KAL
16
38 29
27
33
17
42
19
24
10
39
KAK
21
48
43
48
15
HAD
43
45
43
36
49
18
26
47
46
HAD
HAD
46
44
41
E03
35
20
40
23
HAD
28
BHF
HAD
1
5
BHF
BHF
4
HAD
7
37
HAD
HCJ
BHF
12

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3BR02010
3BR02020
3BR02030
3BR02060
3BR03010
3BR03040
3BR04010
3BR04020
3BR05010
3BR06010
3BR06020
3BR06030
3BR06040
3BR07010
3BR07040
3BR07070
3BR07260
3BR07110
3BR07130
3BR07140
3BR07150
3BR07160
3BR07170
3BR07220
3BR07230
3A707060
2A807050
48128609
29806560
29806810
29822280
3AL05120
3AL06090
3A707110
3A707120
3BC07130
3BP11150
34806150
34907070
3A707030
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
BASE,ADF
FRAME,ADF
STAY,ADF
LEVER,RELEASE SWITCH
LEFT HINGE
RIGHT HINGE
LOWER COVER,CONVEYING
HANDLE,ADF
LABEL,ORIGINAL UPPER LIMIT
TABLE,ADF
FRONT CURSOR
REAR CURSOR
COVER,TABLE
COVER,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
UPPER FILM,CONVEYING
BELT 114,PAPER FEED
MOUNT,HANDLE
FRONT HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER
REAR HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER
HANDLE,PAPER FEED COVER
FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER
REAR SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER
SHAFT,LEADING FEED
GEAR CASSETTE
PIN,UPPER FRONT COVER
BUSHING 6
BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION
SPRING,PF COUPLER
LABEL,DF ORIGINAL CAUTION
CUSHION,ORIGINAL GUIDE
GEAR 30,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,LEADING FEED
ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6
MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER
STOPPER 5
PIN,CLAW CASSETTE
PULLEY,LEADING FEED
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
36211500
68721640
78620710
M2105010
3BR07290
29806710
3AL08170
65016080
C2804100
Description
GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT
PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING
CLAW STOPPER
SHAFT,LEADING FEED
PULLEY,RELEASE LEVER
PULLEY,EJECT
STOP RING E3
POLYESTER SLIDER WASHER 4.1X10X0.5T
13
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
3
1
1
2
2
3
5
1
1
3
1
1
2
2
3
5
1
1
3
1
1
2
2
3
5
2A1/2A2
HAD
21
35
DJW
22
HAD
5
HAD
14
58
49
56
50
44
38
61
24
37
55
BMF
11
HAD
36
19
56
49
HAD
HAD
59
49
4
39
57
KAL
36
9
45
HAD
HAD
33
13
46
HAD
KAL
39
16
45
49
29
41
HAD
34
7
62
HAD
53
60
40
HAD
12
32
57
3
44
42
28
27
49
52
17
KAK
HAD
54
30
51
23
37
48
HAD
49
65
31
51
25
63
10
49
18
64
43
26
23
15
16
47
20
14
38

SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3BR02080
3BR07020
3BR07030
3BR07050
3BR07060
3BR07080
3BR07120
3BR07180
3BR07190
3BR07200
3BR07210
3BR07240
3BR08010
3BR08020
3BR08030
3BR08040
3BR08050
3BR08060
3BR10010
3BR10030
3BR10040
3BR10050
3BR10060
3BR10070
3BR10080
3BR22010
3BR22020
3BR22030
3BR22040
3BR22060
3BR22070
3BR22080
3BR22090
3BR27010
3BR27020
2A127050
28107301
29806560
29806810
3BR07360
Description
MOUNT,RELEASE SWITCH
UPPER ROLLER,REGISTRATION
LOWER ROLLER,REGISTRATION
GUIDE,LIFT
GUIDE,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,LIFT
LEVER,LIFT
SPRING,SEPARATION PULLEY
MOUNT,TIMING SWITCH
ACTUATOR,TIMING SWITCH
MOUNT,SEPARATION PULLEY
GROUND PLATE,SEPARATION PULLEY
STAY,CONVEYING
GUIDE,CONVEYING
GUIDE,READING
SPRING,READING
FILM A,CONVEYING
FILM B,CONVEYING
UPPER ROLLER,EJECT
UPPER GUIDE,EJECT
LOWER GUIDE,EJECT
FILM,EJECT
PULLEY,FEED
PLATE SPRING,EJECT PULLEY
SHAFT,EJECT PULLEY
MOUNT,ADF MOTOR
GEAR 42/20,PAPER FEED
CAM,LIFT
BELT 192,CONVEYING
GEAR 38,LIFT
GEAR,DRIVE ADF
SQUARE SPRING,CAM
TENSION PLATE B,DRIVE
WIRE,ADF
MOTOR,ADF
SWITCH,PHOTO INTERRUPTOR
PRESSING SPRING
BUSHING 6
SPRING,LIFT
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
3AL07250
3A707020
3A707070
3A707090
3A722040
3A722090
3BP11300
33906070
34806150
35320300
35322020
35911790
63527020
65011310
3BR07270
72107160
74808080
3BR07350
M1203200
M2105720
M2107120
3BR07280
3BR07310
3BR07320
3BR07330
'
'
'
'
'
'

Description
REAR STATIC ELIMINATOR,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,SEPARATION
HOLDER,SEPARATION PULLEY
PULLEY 24,CONVEYING
PULLEY,DRIVE
SHEET,READING
TORQUE LIMITER,PAPER FEED
STOPPER 5
SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED PULLEY
SAFETY,SWITCH
GEAR 20,IDLE
PAD,LIFT
BUSHING 6,LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER
BEARING,686ZZNR
FRONT FILM,PAD SEPARATION
OPEN BUSHING,OCB-375
MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2
BINDING BAND SG-130
FILM,LIFT
FRONT PLATE SPRING,SEPARATION
FRONT PAD,SEPARATION
FRONT FILM,SEPARATION
15
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2A1/2A2
2
28
40
36
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
65
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 27
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
HBH
68
KKM
HBH
HBH
62
HBH
67
64
59
29
56
37
BVV
HBH
HBH
23
30
31
34
35
33
19
60
38
HBH
63
32
51
41
58
42
24
47 55
HBH
56
HBH
8
9
HBH
HBH
61
48
53
13
18
20
22
48
61
48
55
21
RDE
14
52
HBH
70
44
HAO
45
53
66
HBH
RDE
12
50
48
61
39
RDE
HBH
53
E07
15
61
HBH
60
46
HBH
57
26
BVV
39
25
E05
48
10
48
61
52
E05
E07
53
RDE
55
BVV
57
69
43
RDE
16
HBH
HDB
17
53
BBA
73
HBH
55
54
49
7 48
71
11
54
48
55
HBH
73
49
72
61
16

SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Part. No.
2A100010
2A105180
2A112080
2A112090
2A193030
2A112111
2A112120
2A112160
2A112170
2A112180
2A112190
2A112200
2A112210
2A112220
2A112230
2A112240
2A112250
2A112260
2A112270
2A112280
2A112290
2A112300
2A112310
2A112320
2A112330
2A112340
2A112350
2A112360
2A112370
2A112380
2A112390
2A112400
2A112410
2A112420
2A112430
2A112441
2A112451
2A112470
2A112490
2A112520
2A1/2A2
Description
SCANNER FRAME ASSY

LABEL,CAUTION CONTACT GLASS
FRONT WIRE,SCANNER
REAR WIRE,SCANNER
PARTS,LAMP SCANNER(SP)
MIRROR A
MIRROR B
CONTACT GLASS
RETAINER,WIRE
MIRROR FRAME A
MIRROR FRAME B
ADJUSTING PLATE B,MIRROR FRAME
LEFT MOUNT,DF HINGE
RIGHT MOUNT,DF HINGE
COVER,INVERTER
REFLECTOR,SCANNER
SHAFT,SCANNER DRIVE
GEAR Z30
GEAR Z23
HOLDER,FFC
GUIDE FFC2
HOLDER,ISU WIRE
MOUNT,SCANNER PI
MOUNT,SCANNER MOTOR
GEAR 27/13,SCANNER DRIVE
BELT S2M60,SCANNER
STANDARD PLATE,SHADING
SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR
MOUNT,DRIVE SHIFT (1510)
GEAR 13,DRIVE SHIFT (1510)
GEAR 25,DRIVE SHIFT (1510)
LEVER,DRIVE SHIFT (1510)
FRICTION PLATE,DRIVE SHIFT
COLLAR,JOINT (1510)
SPRING,FRICTION PLATE
LEFT ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL
REAR ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL
GROUND PLATE,SCANNER MOTOR
PULLEY B,MIRROR FRAME
COVER,ISU
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

Ref.
No.
Part. No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
2A112530
2A193110
2A127780
2A128020
M1651000
2AC12440
2AR22160
2AV12450
2AV12500
2A112680
2A806250
28107400
29812291
33912150
34806150
34806150
35327400
35411070
35411070
35912060
35912210
62227070
M2105020
B4303080
2A112130
2A112670
2A112640
65027470
2A112620
2A112630
2A112650
2A112660
18512340
Description
WORK PLATE,SCANNER DRIVE
PARTS,MOTOR ISU(SP)
WIRE,ISU
INVERTER PCB
FUSE,250V 1,25A MINI 239
GROUND PLATE,INVERTER
SPRING,FIXING TENSION (1510)
SLIDER,SCANNER
SPRING,SCANNER TENSION
FRONT SEAL,SCANNER
RING STOPPER (1510)
BEARING,688ZZNR
CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS
PULLEY,WIRE
STOPPER 5
STOPPER 5 (1510)
SWITCH,FEED
GEAR 21,IDLE
GEAR 21,IDLE (1510)
PULLEY,SCANNER DRUM
SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER
SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT (1510)
TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK) (1510)
CONTACT GLASS,DF
SPONGE,SCANNER BASE
SPRING,JOINT DRIVE (1510)
CORE,7-15X18
LEFT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT
RIGHT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT
FRONT SEAL,SCANNER BASE
REAR SEAL,SCANNER BASE
GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE
17
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2
1
1
2
9
2
5
2
2
1
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2
1
1
2
9
2
5
2
2
1
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2
1
1
2
9
2
5
2
2
1
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2A1/2A2
HDG
;;
;;
6
;
;;
;;
;;
4
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
5
18

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2A168041
2A105131
2A113010
2A113020
2A113050
2A113030
2A113040
2A127860
33927580
'
'
'
'
2A1/2A2
Description
LSU ASSY
LABEL,LASER UNIT
UNIT,LSU
SPONGE 1,LSU
SPONGE 4,LSU
SPONGE 2,LSU
SPONGE 3,LSU
WIRE,LSU
CORE 9-20X32
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

19
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT (DEVELOPING SECTION)
2A1/2A2
BEA
HBI
15
HDB
39
25
KAL
24
10
;;;
;;;
21
34
26
;;;
;;;
;;;
23
12
34
19
13
HDB
HDB
HBH
31
3
8
14 HBI
HDB
37
HDB
28
30
21
22
28
39
20
39
26
11
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
16
;;
;;
;;
36
;;;;;;;;;;;
18
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
33;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
35
17
HDB
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
30
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
38
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;
20
6
32
27
31
29
KAM
FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT (DEVELOPING SECTION)

SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
2A109010
2A109020
2A109030
2A109040
2A114010
2A114021
2A114030
2A114040
2A114050
2A114060
2A114070
2A114080
2A114090
2A114100
2A114110
2A114120
2A114130
2A114161
2A114170
2A114181
2A114190
2A114200
2A114260
2A114270
2A114280
2A114290
2A114300
2A114311
2A114320
2A114330
2A114360
2A127850
2AR14160
2AR14300
2A806250
45592554
49028113
33914190
34806150
Description
FRONT FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION
REAR FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION
FRONT BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION
REAR BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION
MAGNET,DEVELOPING
HOUSING,DEVELOPING
PADDLE,DEVELOPING
LEFT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING
RIGHT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING
MOUNT,DOCTOR BLADE
DOCTOR BLADE,DEVELOPING
UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING
FRONT BUSHING,MAGNET ROLLER
RETAINER,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 16,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 17,IDLE
RIGHT GEAR 26,SPIRAL
REAR SPONGE,DEVELOPING
UPPER SPONGE,DEVELOPING SEAL
FRONT SPONGE,DEVELOPING
SEAL,DEVELOPING
UPPER TERMINAL,DEVELOPING SEAL
FRONT SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER
REAR SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 22,PADDLE
SPONGE,DEVELOPING
BUSHING 6-16,DEVELOPING
GEAR 24,DEVELOPING
INNER SPONGE,DEVELOPING
SPACER,DEVELOPING
JUNCTION WIRING,DEVELOPING
SPACER,TONER SENSOR
LOWER FILM,DEVELOPING
RING STOPPER
BEARING 688ADD
BUSHING 6-19,DEV.UNIT
TONER SENSOR
STOPPER 5
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
7
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
7

21
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT (CLEANING SECTION)
2A1/2A2
4
HDB
;;;
;;;
;;;
18
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;; 12
25
11
;;
;;
17
;;18
;;
;;
20
13
26
24
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
16
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
14
19
1
10
23
15
27 ;;
21
HDB
HDB
3
HBH HBH
22
24
;;;
;;;
HBH
22
KKG
HDB
28
FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT (CLEANING SECTION)

SP
Ref.
No.
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
2A182010
2A108021
2A108030
34918090
2A118014
2A118020
2A118050
2A193040
2A118070
2A118080
2A118101
2A118111
2A118140
2A118150
2A118160
2A118190
2A118200
2A118261
2A118280
2A193050
2A118300
2A118312
2A118323
2A118350
2A118370
2A118380
2A118390
2A168010
Description
SET,DRUM(NEUTRAL)
SHAFT,DRUM
GROUND PLATE,DRUM
GEAR 19,DISPOSAL
HOUSING,CLEANING
SPIRAL,CLEANING
MOUNT,BLADE
PARTS,BLADE CLEANING LOWER(SP)
SHUTTER,DISPOSAL
SPRING,SHUTTER
FRONT SPONGE,CLEANING
REAR SPONGE,CLEANING
SPRING,THRUST
GEAR 25,THRUST
SPRING,BLADE
INNER SPONGE,CLEANING
INNER FILM,CLEANING
UPPER SPONGE,CLEANING
PIPE,SPIRAL
PARTS,BLADE CLEANING B(SP)
CLAW,DRUM SEPARATION
FRONT SPONGE,BLADE
REAR SPONGE,BLADE
BUSHING,BLADE MOUNT
PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION
FRONT SEAL K,CLEANING
REAR SEAL K,CLEANING
MAIN CHARGER ASSY
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
1

23
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
NBA
10
24
30
HDG
27
HDB
13
NBA
4
16
29
HDB
24
30
8
HBI
28
27
6
31
HDB
3
5
26
25
17
12
11
15
NBA
14
16
22 23
HBH
25
21
HBI
18
HDB
24
20
19

SP
Ref.
No.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
2A193060
2A193070
2A193080
2A193090
2A120050
2A120060
2A120071
2A120080
2A120090
2A120100
2A120110
2A120120
2A120130
2A120140
2A120150
2A120160
2A120170
2A120240
2A120250
2A121010
2A121030
2A121040
2A127050
2A127550
2A120260
2A806030
36220210
63820190
65014160
65016080
68820280
75720240
2A1/2A2
Description
PARTS,ROLLER HEAT(SP)
PARTS,ROLLER PRESS(SP)
PARTS,HEATER FIXING 120(SP)
GEAR,HEAT ROLLER
BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER
SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER
THERMISTOR,FIXING
RIGHT HOUSING,FIXING
LEFT HOUSING,FIXING
UPPER GUIDE,FIXING
LOWER GUIDE,FIXING
FRONT LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE
REAR LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE
FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER
REAR SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER
HOLDER,HEAT ROLLER
GEAR 44,FIXING IDLE
FRONT COVER,FIXING
ROLLER,EJECT
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
SPRING,EJECT SWITCH
SWITCH,PHOT0 INTERRUPTOR
JUNCTION WIRING,EJECT SWITCH
SPRING,PRESS ROLLER
BUSH FEED
LEFT THERMOSTAT,FIXING
BEARING, FIXING UNIT
RIGHT GEAR 25,TONER SUPPLY
STOP RING E3
HOLDER,BEARING
SPRING SEPARATION CLAW
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
4

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
25
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
10
HBI
HDB
18
28
32
HDB
16
15
28
19
13
12
21
17
20
25
28
28
24
31
30 1
28
14
11
28 29
23
35
28
8
HBH
36
3
6
HDB
26
HDB
HBH
34
HBH
22
5
34
BHI
4
33
27
BHI
26

SP
Ref.
No.
'
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
2A106090
2A106100
2A115010
2A115020
2A115030
2A115050
2A115040
2A115060
2AV27330
34922570
2A115070
2A193100
2A122020
2A122030
2A122040
2A122050
2A122060
2A122080
2A122100
2A122110
2A122150
2A122190
2A122200
2A122120
2A122160
2A127080
2A806250
29822230
33915190
34806150
35322190
35322200
35322210
63822220
71804400
73818100
2A122180
2A102510
2A1/2A2
Description
GEAR 32,REGISTRATION CLUTCH

GROUND PLATE,REGISTRATION ROLLER
HOUSING,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
MOUNT,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
GEAR 24A,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
GEAR 24B,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
CLUTCH,PAPER FEED
GEAR 23,DEVELOPING
GEAR,TONER MOTOR
PARTS,MOTOR MAIN(SP)
GEAR 53,DRUM DRIVE
GEAR 28/20,COUPLER
GEAR 97/25
GEAR 67/30
GEAR 45/40
GEAR 26/20
COUPLING,DEVELOPING DRIVE
MOUNT,MACHINE DRIVE
GEAR 23/16
SPRING,DRUM COUPLING
SPRING,DEVELOPING COUPLING
MOUNT,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 37/21
CLUTCH,REGISTRATION
RING STOPPER
GEAR 16T,PF IDLE
TONER MOTOR
STOPPER 5
GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER
COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE
SPRING,FIXING COUPLER
GEAR,41
SPRING, BLADE THRUST
GEAR 32/18
LEFT HPLDER,CASETTE
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1

27
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
39
BIA
29
HBH
HBH
31
33
HBH
HBH
28
30
BIB
44
HBH
22
24
47
15
HAU
42
HBH
26
HBH
HDB
43
21
HBH
38
HBH
HBH
17
22
41
HBH
32
16
HAU
HBH
GEA
37
HDB
46
48
HBH
3
40
25
34
35
HBH
HBH
11
12
BBB
27
20
BBK
HBH
23
45
BBK
10
36
13
19
120V
18
5
230V / 240V
8
9
28
HBH
14
19

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2A101022
2A101060
2A201020
2A201030
2A101050
L0223130
63127120
35927420
65027470
2A193010
2A193020
2A126160
2A127070
2A128051
2A128061
M1661000
M1756010
M1655030
M1753010
2AL27090
2AN27360
M2607010
2A127050
2A127830
2A126030
2A126130
2A126150
2AV26220
3BH26030
2A127791
2A127601
2A127820
2A126010
2A126020
2A126060
2A126070
2A126080
2A127500
2A127510
2A127521
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
MAIN PCB ASSY (1510)
MAIN PCB ASSY(F C C) (1510)
MAIN PCB ASSY (1810)
MAIN PCB ASSY(F C C) (1810)
NOISE FILTER ASSY(230)
ROUND TYPE TERMINAL,M4,LRT-51T-4FE
NOISE FILTER,10A
SWITCH,SIZE
CORE,7-15X18
PARTS,POWER SOURCE ASSY 120(SP)
MOUNT,POWER SOURCE PCB
SWITCH,MAIN
POWER SOURCE PCB 120
FUSE 15A,314015
FUSE S506-6,3A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,237005(LITTEL)
FUSE S506-3,15A(BUSSMANN)
POWER CORD(USA)
POWER CORD(230)
BINDING BAND,PLT1M
JUNCTION WIRING,REGISTRATION SW
SHIELD,MEMORY BOARD (1510)
PIN,OPTION
COVER PCB,SHIELD
LOWER LID,SHIELD
PIN,OPTION
WIRE,INLET
WIRE,INLET(230)
WIRE,FIXING HEATER
MOUNT,MAIN PCB
SHIELD,PCB
GUIDE,MEMORY BOARD
GUIDE,NETWORK BOARD
GUIDE,PRINTER BOARD
WIRE,ISU
LEFT WIRE
FRONT WIRE
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
'
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
2A193120
2A201010
2A226010
2A228010
2A228020
2A127800
2A123010
2A102130
2A102500
2A102120
2A102140
2A102150
2A127040
2A102520
2A127060
63511220
2A327010
1
1
1
'
'
1
1
1
'
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
'
Description
PARTS,PCB HIGH VOLTAGE(SP)
MEMORY PCB ASSY (1810)
MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD (1810)
MEMORY PCB (1810)
IC DIMM (1810)
WIRE,RELAY SHORT CIRCUIT
FAN,COOLING
MOUNT,INLET
MOUNT,INLET(230)
GROUND PLATE,INLET
WORK PLATE,SAFETY SWITCH
SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH
SWITCH,INTERLOCK
RIGHT HOLDER.CASSETTE
INLET 3P,POWER SOURCE
STOP RING,4
SENSOR,HUMIDITY
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

29
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2A1/2A2
3
1
7
HDB
8
HBH
BHI
5
HBI
30

SP
Ref.
No.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part. No.
2A104063
2A125021
2A125061
2A125071
2A125030
2A125040
2A125050
2A193130
2A104120
2A102160
2A1/2A2
Description
TRAY,EJECT
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(INCH)
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(METRIC)
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(MAP)
SHEET B,OPERATION UNIT
SHEET,DUST SHIELD
LID,OPERATION UNIT
PARTS,PCB OPERATION UNIT(SP)
WIND SHIELD PLATE,EJECT TRAY
AUXILIARY PLATE,EJECT TRAY
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

31
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2A1/2A2
5
8
9
7
2
15
BBK
4
10
12
16
14
11
13
32

SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2A160010
2A201010
2A226010
2A228010
2A228020
2A173800
2A173810
2A173820
2A173830
36505111
2AV68030
2A168050
35968010
2A168070
2A168080
NAS09010
Description
MEMORY PCB ASSY OP (1510)
MEMORY PCB ASSY (1510)
MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD (1510)
MEMORY PCB (1510)
IC DIMM (1510)
TONER DISPOSAL TANK ASSY
TANK,TONER DISPOSAL
SHIELD,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
TAPE,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
SPECIAL TOOL MEMORY PCB
IC,ROM MAIN PCB
FLASH JIG PCB
SHEET,SCANNER ADJUSTMENT
SPECIAL TOOL,FRAME RETAINING
BACKUP RAM M48Z35Y-70PC
2A1/2A2
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

33
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
INDEX
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
2A1/2A2
Part. No.
18512340
19507011
19507040
19507050
19507080
19512210
2AC12440
2AL27090
2AN27360
2AR14160
2AR14300
2AR17080
2AR22160
2AV12450
2AV12500
2AV26220
2AV27330
2AV27340
2AV68030
2A005060
2A100010
2A101022
2A101050
2A101060
2A102010
2A102021
2A102030
2A102090
2A102100
2A102110
2A102120
2A102130
2A102140
2A102150
2A102160
2A102500
2A102510
2A102520
2A104012
2A104021
Description
GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE
CASSETTE,PAPER FEED
BASE,CASSETTE
RETAINING PIN,MIRROR FRAME
GROUND PLATE,INVERTER
POWER CORD(USA)
POWER CORD(230)
SPACER,TONER SENSOR
LOWER FILM,DEVELOPING
COLLAR,TRANSFER ROLLER
SPRING,FIXING TENSION
SLIDER,SCANNER
SPRING,SCANNER TENSION
LOWER LID,SHIELD
CLUTCH,PAPER FEED
CLUTCH,BYPASS
SPECIAL TOOL MEMORY PCB
LABEL,HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION(EUR)
SCANNER FRAME ASSY
MAIN PCB ASSY
NOISE FILTER ASSY(230)
MAIN PCB ASSY(F C C)
BASE
FRAME IMAGE FORMATION
RIGHT FRAME
LEFT RAIL,CASSETTE
HANDLE,JAM RELEASE
FULCRUM PIN,CONVEYING
GROUND PLATE,INLET
MOUNT,INLET
WORK PLATE,SAFETY SWITCH
SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH
AUXILIARY PLATE,EJECT TRAY
MOUNT,INLET(230)
LEFT HPLDER,CASETTE
RIGHT HOLDER.CASSETTE
FRONT COVER
UPPER FRONT COVER
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
8
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
8
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
8
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
SP
Part. No.
8
3
3
3
3
1
8
14
14
10
10
4
8
8
8
14
13
2
16
1
8
14
14
14
2
2
2
2
4
4
14
14
14
14
15
14
13
14
1
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
2A104032
2A104041
2A104052
2A104063
2A104071
2A104080
2A104090
2A104100
2A104110
2A104120
2A105080
2A105091
2A105131
2A105140
2A105160
2A105180
2A106010
2A106020
2A106031
2A106040
2A106060
2A106071
2A106081
2A106090
2A106100
2A106120
2A106150
2A106160
2A106170
2A106180
2A106191
2A106200
2A106210
2A106220
2A106230
2A106240
2A106510
2A106530
2A106540
2A106550
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
34
Description
RIGHT COVER
LEFT COVER
COVER,CONVEYING
TRAY,EJECT
REAR COVER
COVER,DISPOSAL TANK
COVER,PRINTER BOARD
RIGHT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER
LEFT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER
WIND SHIELD PLATE,EJECT TRAY
LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION
LABEL,CONVEYING JAM
LABEL,LASER UNIT
LABEL,CARTRIDGE OPERATION
LABEL,DF CAUTION
LABEL,CAUTION CONTACT GLASS
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
LEFT ROLLER,REGISTRATION
RIGHT ROLLER,REGISTRATION
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING
ACTUATOR,REGISTRATION
SPRING,REGISTRATION ACTUATOR
GEAR 32,REGISTRATION CLUTCH
GROUND PLATE,REGISTRATION ROLLER
FRONT SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING
LEFT GEAR 14,REGISTRATION
RIGHT GEAR 15,REGISTRATION
PULLEY B,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED CL
RIGHT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION
LEFT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION
GUIDE FILM,PAPER FEED CONFLUENCE
GUIDE FILM,PRIMARY PAPER FEED
FRONT SHEET,REGISTRATION
PULLEY,BYPASS
UPPER GUIDE,BYPASS
GUIDE,BYPASS LIFT
HOLDER,BYPASS PAD
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
1
1
4
15
1
1
1
1
1
15
4
1
9
1
1
8
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
13
13
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2A1/2A2
SP
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
'
2A106560
2A106570
2A106581
2A106590
2A106680
2A106690
2A106700
2A106721
2A106730
2A106740
2A106760
2A106770
2A106810
2A106820
2A106831
2A106841
2A107011
2A107020
2A107030
2A107040
2A107050
2A107060
2A108021
2A108030
2A109010
2A109020
2A109030
2A109040
2A110150
2A112080
2A112090
2A112111
2A112120
2A112130
2A112160
2A112170
2A112180
2A112190
2A112200
2A112210
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
CAM,BYPASS LIFT
STOPPER,BYPASS LIFT
SPRING,BYPASS LIFT
SPRING,BYPASS PAD
PAD,BYPASS
SHAFT,BYPASS
GROUND PLATE,BYPASS LIFT
GUIDE,BYPASS PAD
FRONT BUSHING,BYPASS
VIBRATION INSULATOR,PAD HOLDER
FRICTION PLATE C,BYPASS LIFT
SHEET,PAD HOLDER
TABLE,BYPASS
COVER,BYPASS TABLE
FRONT CURSOR,BYPASS
REAR CURSOR,BYPASS
COVER,CASSETTE
SPRING,CASSETTE
SLIDER,CASSETTE
FRONT CLAW CASSETTE
SHAFT,DRUM
GROUND PLATE,DRUM
FRONT FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION
REAR FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION
FRONT BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION
REAR BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION
LIGHT SHIELD,CLEANING LAMP
FRONT WIRE,SCANNER
REAR WIRE,SCANNER
MIRROR A
MIRROR B
CONTACT GLASS,DF
CONTACT GLASS
RETAINER,WIRE
MIRROR FRAME A
MIRROR FRAME B
ADJUSTING PLATE B,MIRROR FRAME
LEFT MOUNT,DF HINGE
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
3
3
11
11
10
10
10
10
2
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
35
Part. No.
2A112220
2A112230
2A112240
2A112250
2A112260
2A112270
2A112280
2A112290
2A112300
2A112310
2A112320
2A112330
2A112340
2A112350
2A112360
2A112370
2A112380
2A112390
2A112400
2A112410
2A112420
2A112430
2A112441
2A112451
2A112470
2A112490
2A112520
2A112530
2A112620
2A112630
2A112640
2A112650
2A112660
2A112670
2A112680
2A112700
2A113010
2A113020
2A113030
2A113040
Description
RIGHT MOUNT,DF HINGE
COVER,INVERTER
REFLECTOR,SCANNER
SHAFT,SCANNER DRIVE
GEAR Z30
GEAR Z23
HOLDER,FFC
GUIDE FFC2
HOLDER,ISU WIRE
MOUNT,SCANNER PI
MOUNT,SCANNER MOTOR
GEAR 27/13,SCANNER DRIVE
BELT S2M60,SCANNER
STANDARD PLATE,SHADING
SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR
MOUNT,DRIVE SHIFT
GEAR 13,DRIVE SHIFT
GEAR 25,DRIVE SHIFT
LEVER,DRIVE SHIFT
FRICTION PLATE,DRIVE SHIFT
COLLAR,JOINT
SPRING,FRICTION PLATE
LEFT ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL
REAR ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL
GROUND PLATE,SCANNER MOTOR
PULLEY B,MIRROR FRAME
COVER,ISU
WORK PLATE,SCANNER DRIVE
LEFT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT
RIGHT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT
SPRING,JOINT DRIVE
FRONT SEAL,SCANNER BASE
REAR SEAL,SCANNER BASE
SPONGE,SCANNER BASE
FRONT SEAL,SCANNER
RETAINING PIN A,MIRROR FRAME
UNIT,LSU
SPONGE 1,LSU
SPONGE 2,LSU
SPONGE 3,LSU
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
9
9
9
9
2A1/2A2
SP
Part. No.
'
2A113050
2A114010
2A114021
2A114030
2A114040
2A114050
2A114060
2A114070
2A114080
2A114090
2A114100
2A114110
2A114120
2A114130
2A114161
2A114170
2A114181
2A114190
2A114200
2A114260
2A114270
2A114280
2A114290
2A114300
2A114311
2A114320
2A114330
2A114340
2A114360
2A115010
2A115020
2A115030
2A115040
2A115050
2A115060
2A115070
2A116010
2A116020
2A116040
2A116050
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
SPONGE 4,LSU
MAGNET,DEVELOPING
HOUSING,DEVELOPING
PADDLE,DEVELOPING
LEFT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING
RIGHT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING
MOUNT,DOCTOR BLADE
DOCTOR BLADE,DEVELOPING
UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING
FRONT BUSHING,MAGNET ROLLER
RETAINER,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 16,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 17,IDLE
RIGHT GEAR 26,SPIRAL
REAR SPONGE,DEVELOPING
UPPER SPONGE,DEVELOPING SEAL
FRONT SPONGE,DEVELOPING
SEAL,DEVELOPING
UPPER TERMINAL,DEVELOPING SEAL
FRONT SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER
REAR SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER
GEAR 22,PADDLE
SPONGE,DEVELOPING
GEAR 24,DEVELOPING
INNER SPONGE,DEVELOPING
HOLDER,DEVELOPING
SPACER,DEVELOPING
HOUSING,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
MOUNT,CARTRIDGE DRIVE
GEAR,TONER MOTOR
ROLLER,TRANSFER
FRONT GUIDE,TRANSFER
PULLEY,TRANSFER
REAR GUIDE TRANSFER
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
Fig. No.
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
10
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
4
4
4
4
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
36
Part. No.
2A116060
2A116070
2A116080
2A116090
2A116100
2A116111
2A116121
2A116130
2A116140
2A116150
2A116160
2A116171
2A116180
2A116190
2A116200
2A116210
2A116220
2A116240
2A118014
2A118020
2A118050
2A118070
2A118080
2A118101
2A118111
2A118140
2A118150
2A118160
2A118190
2A118200
2A118240
2A118250
2A118261
2A118280
2A118300
2A118312
2A118323
2A118350
2A118370
2A118380
Description
HOUSING,CONVEYING
SPRING,CONVEYING PRESSURE
FRONT SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER
REAR SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER
SHAFT,HOOK
FRONT BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE
REAR BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE
HOLDER,PRESSURE SPRING
TERMINAL,TRANSFER GUIDE
HOLDER,TRANSFER PRESSURE SPRING
SPRING,CONVEYING RELEASE
STATIC ELIMINATOR,TRANSFER
BUSHING,TRANSFER
GEAR,TRANSFER
ROLLER,TRANSFER,METRIC
FRONT SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE
CLEANER,TRANSFER
SEAL B,TRANSFER ROLLER
HOUSING,CLEANING
SPIRAL,CLEANING
MOUNT,BLADE
SHUTTER,DISPOSAL
SPRING,SHUTTER
FRONT SPONGE,CLEANING
REAR SPONGE,CLEANING
SPRING,THRUST
GEAR 25,THRUST
SPRING,BLADE
INNER SPONGE,CLEANING
INNER FILM,CLEANING
DETECTION PLATE,DISPOSAL TANK
SPRING,TANK DETECTION
UPPER SPONGE,CLEANING
PIPE,SPIRAL
CLAW,DRUM SEPARATION
FRONT SPONGE,BLADE
REAR SPONGE,BLADE
BUSHING,BLADE MOUNT
PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION
FRONT SEAL K,CLEANING
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
2
3
1
Fig. No.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
1
1
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
2A1/2A2
SP
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
'
2A118390
2A120050
2A120060
2A120071
2A120080
2A120090
2A120100
2A120110
2A120120
2A120130
2A120140
2A120150
2A120160
2A120170
2A120240
2A120250
2A120260
2A121010
2A121020
2A121030
2A121040
2A121050
2A121060
2A122020
2A122030
2A122040
2A122050
2A122060
2A122080
2A122100
2A122110
2A122120
2A122150
2A122160
2A122180
2A122190
2A122200
2A123010
2A125021
2A125030
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
REAR SEAL K,CLEANING
GEAR,HEAT ROLLER
BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER
SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER
THERMISTOR,FIXING
RIGHT HOUSING,FIXING
LEFT HOUSING,FIXING
UPPER GUIDE,FIXING
LOWER GUIDE,FIXING
FRONT LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE
REAR LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE
FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER
REAR SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER
HOLDER,HEAT ROLLER
GEAR 44,FIXING IDLE
FRONT COVER,FIXING
SPRING,PRESS ROLLER
ROLLER,EJECT
PLATE SPRING,EJECT
ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH
SPRING,EJECT SWITCH
STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT
GROUND PLATE,EJECT
GEAR 53,DRUM DRIVE
GEAR 28/20,COUPLER
GEAR 97/25
GEAR 67/30
GEAR 45/40
GEAR 26/20
COUPLING,DEVELOPING DRIVE
MOUNT,MACHINE DRIVE
MOUNT,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 23/16
GEAR 37/21
GEAR 32/18
SPRING,DRUM COUPLING
SPRING,DEVELOPING COUPLING
FAN,COOLING
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(INCH)
SHEET B,OPERATION UNIT
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
SP
Part. No.
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2
12
12
2
2
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
15
15
'
'
'
'
2A125040
2A125050
2A125061
2A125071
2A126010
2A126020
2A126030
2A126060
2A126070
2A126080
2A126090
2A126130
2A126150
2A126160
2A127010
2A127040
2A127050
2A127060
2A127070
2A127080
2A127500
2A127510
2A127521
2A127550
2A127601
2A127780
2A127791
2A127800
2A127820
2A127830
2A127850
2A127860
2A127890
2A127900
2A127910
2A128020
2A128051
2A128061
2A160010
2A168010
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
37
Description
SHEET,DUST SHIELD
LID,OPERATION UNIT
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(METRIC)
SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(MAP)
MOUNT,MAIN PCB
SHIELD,PCB
SHIELD,MEMORY BOARD
GUIDE,MEMORY BOARD
GUIDE,NETWORK BOARD
GUIDE,PRINTER BOARD
GROUND PLATE,IMAGE FORMATION
PIN,OPTION
COVER PCB,SHIELD
MOUNT,POWER SOURCE PCB
LAMP,CLEANING
SWITCH,INTERLOCK
INLET 3P,POWER SOURCE
SWITCH,MAIN
CLUTCH,REGISTRATION
WIRE,ISU
LEFT WIRE
FRONT WIRE
JUNCTION WIRING,EJECT SWITCH
WIRE,INLET(230)
WIRE,ISU
WIRE,INLET
WIRE,RELAY SHORT CIRCUIT
WIRE,FIXING HEATER
JUNCTION WIRING,REGISTRATION SW
JUNCTION WIRING,DEVELOPING
WIRE,LSU
TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER JUNCTION
TERMINAL,GRID JUNCTION
TERMINAL,TRANSFER JUNCTION
INVERTER PCB
MEMORY PCB ASSY OP
MAIN CHARGER ASSY
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
6
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
15
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
14
14
2
14
14
14
2
14
5,7,12,14
14
14
13
14
14
14
12
14
8
14
14
14
14
10
9
2
2
2
8
14
14
16
11
2A1/2A2
SP
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
'
'
2A168034
2A168041
2A168050
2A168064
2A168070
2A168080
2A173800
2A173810
2A173820
2A173830
2A182010
2A193010
2A193020
2A193030
2A193040
2A193050
2A193060
2A193070
2A193080
2A193090
2A193100
2A193110
2A193120
2A193130
2A201010
2A201020
2A201030
2A204012
2A204021
2A226010
2A228010
2A228020
2A327010
2A806030
2A806250
2A806720
2A807050
28107301
28107400
29806560
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
TRANSFER ROLLER ASSY
LSU ASSY
IC,ROM MAIN PCB
TRANSFER ROLLER ASSY(METRIC)
SHEET,SCANNER ADJUSTMENT
SPECIAL TOOL,FRAME RETAINING
TONER DISPOSAL TANK ASSY
TANK,TONER DISPOSAL
SHIELD,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
TAPE,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
SET,DRUM(NEUTRAL)
PARTS,LAMP SCANNER(SP)
PARTS,BLADE CLEANING LOWER(SP)
PARTS,BLADE CLEANING B(SP)
PARTS,ROLLER HEAT(SP)
PARTS,ROLLER PRESS(SP)
PARTS,MOTOR MAIN(SP)
PARTS,MOTOR ISU(SP)
PARTS,PCB HIGH VOLTAGE(SP)
PARTS,PCB OPERATION UNIT(SP)
MEMORY PCB ASSY
MAIN PCB ASSY
MAIN PCB ASSY(F C C)
FRONT COVER
REAR COVER
MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD
MEMORY PCB
IC DIMM
SENSOR,HUMIDITY
BUSH FEED
RING STOPPER
GEAR MPF
GEAR CASSETTE
PRESSING SPRING
BEARING,688ZZNR
BUSHING 6
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
3
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
3
1
1
2
2
3
Fig. No.
4
9
16
4
16
16
16
16
16
16
11
14
14
8
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
8
14
15
14,16
14
14
1
1
14,16
14,16
14,16
14
2,12
2,8,10,13
4
6
7
8
6,7
38
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
29806710
29806810
29812291
29822230
29822280
3AL05120
3AL06090
3AL07250
3AL08170
3A707020
3A707030
3A707060
3A707070
3A707090
3A707110
3A707120
3A722040
3A722090
3BC07130
3BH26030
3BP11070
3BP11080
3BP11090
3BP11100
3BP11110
3BP11120
3BP11130
3BP11140
3BP11150
3BP11160
3BP11170
3BP11180
3BP11190
3BP11220
3BP11230
3BP11240
3BP11250
3BP11270
3BP11280
3BP11290
Description
PULLEY,RELEASE LEVER
CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS
GEAR 16T,PF IDLE
SPRING,PF COUPLER
LABEL,DF ORIGINAL CAUTION
CUSHION,ORIGINAL GUIDE
REAR STATIC ELIMINATOR,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,EJECT
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,LEADING FEED
SHAFT,LEADING FEED
SHAFT,SEPARATION
HOLDER,SEPARATION PULLEY
GEAR 30,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,LEADING FEED
PULLEY 24,CONVEYING
PULLEY,DRIVE
ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6
PIN,OPTION
COVER,ADF
HOUSING,CONVEYING
GUIDE,ORIGINAL
ROLLER,CONVEYING
ROLLER,EJECT
MOUNT,DRIVE
GEAR 25/19
SPRING,CONVEYING
MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER
UPPER HINGE
LOWER HINGE
ACTUATOR,TIMING DETECTION
SPRING,ORIGINAL GUIDE
WIRE,ADF
FRONT FILM,CONVEYING
REAR FILM,CONVEYING
SHAFT,HINGE
PULLEY 22,CONVEYING
GEAR 20,CONVEYING
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2
3
9
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
9
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
9
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
Fig. No.
6
6,7
8
13
6
6
6
7
6
7
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
5,7
6
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5,6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2A1/2A2
SP
Part. No.
'
3BP11300
3BP11310
3BP11320
3BP11330
3BR02010
3BR02020
3BR02030
3BR02060
3BR02080
3BR03010
3BR03040
3BR04010
3BR04020
3BR05010
3BR06010
3BR06020
3BR06030
3BR06040
3BR07010
3BR07020
3BR07030
3BR07040
3BR07050
3BR07060
3BR07070
3BR07080
3BR07110
3BR07120
3BR07130
3BR07140
3BR07150
3BR07160
3BR07170
3BR07180
3BR07190
3BR07200
3BR07210
3BR07220
3BR07230
3BR07240
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Description
SHEET,READING
TRAY,EJECT
MOUNT,PULLEY
RETAINER,TENSION
BASE,ADF
FRAME,ADF
STAY,ADF
LEVER,RELEASE SWITCH
MOUNT,RELEASE SWITCH
LEFT HINGE
RIGHT HINGE
LOWER COVER,CONVEYING
HANDLE,ADF
LABEL,ORIGINAL UPPER LIMIT
TABLE,ADF
FRONT CURSOR
REAR CURSOR
COVER,TABLE
COVER,PAPER FEED
UPPER ROLLER,REGISTRATION
LOWER ROLLER,REGISTRATION
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
GUIDE,LIFT
GUIDE,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,LIFT
LEVER,LIFT
BELT 114,PAPER FEED
MOUNT,HANDLE
FRONT HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER
REAR HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER
HANDLE,PAPER FEED COVER
SPRING,SEPARATION PULLEY
MOUNT,TIMING SWITCH
ACTUATOR,TIMING SWITCH
MOUNT,SEPARATION PULLEY
FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER
REAR SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER
GROUND PLATE,SEPARATION PULLEY
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
5,7
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
6
7
7
6
7
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
7
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
39
Part. No.
3BR07260
3BR07270
3BR07280
3BR07290
3BR07310
3BR07320
3BR07330
3BR07350
3BR07360
3BR08010
3BR08020
3BR08030
3BR08040
3BR08050
3BR08060
3BR10010
3BR10030
3BR10040
3BR10050
3BR10060
3BR10070
3BR10080
3BR22010
3BR22020
3BR22030
3BR22040
3BR22060
3BR22070
3BR22080
3BR22090
3BR27010
3BR27020
33906070
33912150
33914190
33915190
33927580
34806140
34806150
Description
UPPER FILM,CONVEYING
PAD,LIFT
FILM,LIFT
SHAFT,
FRONT PLATE SPRING,SEPARATION
FRONT PAD,SEPARATION
FRONT FILM,SEPARATION
FRONT FILM,PAD SEPARATION
SPRING,LIFT
STAY,CONVEYING
GUIDE,CONVEYING
GUIDE,READING
SPRING,READING
FILM A,CONVEYING
FILM B,CONVEYING
UPPER ROLLER,EJECT
UPPER GUIDE,EJECT
LOWER GUIDE,EJECT
FILM,EJECT
PULLEY,FEED
PLATE SPRING,EJECT PULLEY
SHAFT,EJECT PULLEY
MOUNT,ADF MOTOR
GEAR 42/20,PAPER FEED
CAM,LIFT
BELT 192,CONVEYING
GEAR 38,LIFT
GEAR,DRIVE ADF
SQUARE SPRING,CAM
TENSION PLATE B,DRIVE
WIRE,ADF
MOTOR,ADF
TORQUE LIMITER,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,WIRE
TONER SENSOR
TONER MOTOR
CORE 9-20X32
STOPPER 4
STOPPER 5
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
34
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
27
Fig. No.
6
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5,7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
10
13
9
5
2,6,7,8,
10,13
2A1/2A2
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
34806480
34906150
34906160
34907021
34907031
34907050
34907060
34907070
34907131
34907141
34907290
34907330
34917170
34918090
34922570
35320300
35322020
35322190
35322200
35322210
35327400
35411070
35904270
35911790
35912060
35912210
35927420
35968010
36211500
36220210
36505111
45592554
48128609
48129208
49028113
49628105
62227070
63127120
63511220
63527020
Description
STOPPER 6
OUTER BUSHING,PAPER FEED
REAR CLAW,CASSETTE
PIN,CLAW CASSETTE
REAR STOPPER,PAPER
GEAR 18,CASSETTE
PULLEY,GUIDE
PULLEY,TRANSFER HOLDER
GEAR 19,DISPOSAL
GEAR 23,DEVELOPING
SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE
GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER
COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE
SPRING,FIXING COUPLER
SWITCH,FEED
GEAR 21,IDLE
HOOK,CONVEYING HANDLE
GEAR 20,PAPER FEED PULLEY
PULLEY,SCANNER DRUM
SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER
SWITCH,SIZE
FLASH JIG PCB
GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT
LEFT THERMOSTAT,FIXING
LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK
BEARING 688ADD
PIN,UPPER FRONT COVER
PIN,TENSION
BUSHING 6-19,DEV.UNIT
RECEIVER,MAGNET
SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT
NOISE FILTER,10A
STOP RING,4
SAFETY,SWITCH
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
SP
Part. No.
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3,6
3
3
2
3
5
11
13
7
7
13
13
13
8
8
4
7
8
8
14
16
6
12
16
10
6
5
10
1
8
14
14
7
'
63820190
63822220
65011310
65014160
65016080
65027470
65902670
66006840
67322230
68720160
68721640
68802070
68820280
71804400
72107160
73818100
74808080
75720240
76508130
78620710
B4303080
C2804100
J7330120
L0223130
M1203200
M1651000
M1655030
M1661000
M1753010
M1756010
M2105010
M2105020
M2105720
M2107120
M2607010
NAS09010
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
40
Description
BEARING, FIXING UNIT
GEAR,41
GEAR 20,IDLE
RIGHT GEAR 25,TONER SUPPLY
STOP RING E3
CORE,7-15X18
CUSHION RUBBER
BUSHING 4
BUSHING 8
PULLEY,FEED SHIFT
PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING
SPRING A,LIFT UP
HOLDER,BEARING
BUSHING 6,LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER
SPRING, BLADE THRUST
BEARING,686ZZNR
SPRING SEPARATION CLAW
CLAW STOPPER
TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK)
POLYESTER SLIDER WASHER 4.1X10X0.5T
PLUG,9715B-12A(IRS)
ROUND TYPE TERMINAL,M4,LRT-51T-4FE
OPEN BUSHING,OCB-375
FUSE,250V 1,25A MINI 239
FUSE,237005(LITTEL)
FUSE 15A,314015
FUSE,S506-3,15A(BUSSMANN)
FUSE,S506-6,3A(BUSSMANN)
BINDING BAND SG-130
BINDING BAND,PLT1M
BACKUP RAM M48Z35Y-70PC
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
2
1
1
1
9
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
3
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
9
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
3
1
5
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
9
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
3
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
12
13
7
12
5,6,12
8,14
2
5
2
2
6
3
12
1,13
7
13
7
12
3
6
8
6
2
14
7
8
14
14
14
14
6
5,8
7
7
14
16
ST-13
CONTENTS
FIG.1 CASSETTE
FIG.2 DECK UNIT
INDEX
FIG. 1 CASSETTE
3BG
19
7
12
11
14
HDC
WAD
16
10
17
14
8
9*
18
13
15
9*
HAT
* REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) are not necessary

when using inch-sized paper [8.5" x 14",8.5" x 11" or 5.5" x 8.5"].
FIG. 1 CASSETTE
SP
Ref.
No.
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
'
'
'
'
3BG
Part. No.
Description
2A107011
2A107020
2A107030
2A107050
76508130
19507011
19507040
19507050
19507080
34907021
34907031
34907050
34907060
34907070
34907131
34907141
34907330
68802070
2A107060
COVER,CASSETTE
SPRING,CASSETTE
FRONT CLAW CASSETTE
CASSETTE,PAPER FEED
BASE,CASSETTE
REAR CLAW,CASSETTE
PIN,CLAW CASSETTE
REAR STOPPER,PAPER
GEAR 18,CASSETTE
SPRING A,LIFT UP
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2

Quantity
120V 230V 240V
FIG. 2 DECK UNIT
3BG
16
HAO
37
17
19
31
41
18
38
22
37
45
24
28
BBB
43
BBB
BBK
30
BBK
39
BHI
39
BBK
BBB
HAO
33
35
46
26
20
47
BHI
BHI
HAO
BBB
29
37
12
48
29
30
37
37
BBB
27
25
32
42
15
11
40 36
21
HAO
23
BBB
HCB
10
HAO
34
14
35
HAO
34
33
37
BBB
BBB
13
44
HDB
42
44
BBB
HDB
FIG. 2 DECK UNIT
3BG
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3BG02010
3BG02020
3BG02030
3BG02040
3BG02050
3BG02060
3BG02070
3BG04010
3BG04020
3BG04030
3BG04040
72114120
3BG05020
3BG06010
3BG06020
3BG06030
3BG06040
3BG06050
3BG06060
3BG22010
3BG22020
3BG22040
3BG27010
3BG27030
74318270
2AV27330
2A106010
2A106040
2A106170
2A106191
29806560
29806810
3A504020
3A506070
3A506090
34806140
34806150
34906150
34907290
34918090
BASE,PAPER FEED
GROUND PLATE,MACHINE
STOPPER,CASSETTE GROUND
SLIDER,CASSETTE
COVER,GROUND
PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER
LEFT GROUND PLATE,MACHINE
COVER,RELEASE
UPPER REAR COVER
REAR COVER,LID
HOOK,RELEASE
GEAR 19,DEVELOPER UNIT
LABEL,CASSETTE SIZE
GUIDE,PAPER FEED
ROLLER,FEED
HOUSING,PAPER FEED
ACTUATOR,FEED
COVER,ACTUATOR
SPRING,ACTUATOR
MOUNT,DRIVE
GEAR 25/59
SHAFT,CLUTCH
WIRE,CASSETTE
MOTOR,CASSETTE
SPRING,TONER DISPOSAL
CLUTCH,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
PULLEY B,PAPER FEED
BUSHING 6
COUPLER,RELEASE
PULLEY,CONVEYING
SPRING,PRESSING
STOPPER 4
STOPPER 5
PULLEY,GUIDE
GEAR 19,DISPOSAL
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
6
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
6
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
6
1
2
1

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
'
'
'
'
'
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
35327400
35927420
36093040
66260030
67322230
M2105720
M2107120
M2104260
Description
SWITCH,FEED
SWITCH,SIZE
PARTS MOTOR DRIVE PCB(SP)
BASE RUBBER,SORTER
BUSHING 8
BINDING BAND SG-130
EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA)
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
INDEX
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
3BG
Part. No.
19507011
19507040
19507050
19507080
2AV27330
2A106010
2A106040
2A106170
2A106191
2A107011
2A107020
2A107030
2A107050
2A107060
29806560
29806810
3A504020
3A506070
3A506090
3BG02010
3BG02020
3BG02030
3BG02040
3BG02050
3BG02060
3BG02070
3BG04010
3BG04020
3BG04030
3BG04040
3BG05020
3BG06010
3BG06020
3BG06030
3BG06040
3BG06050
3BG06060
3BG22010
3BG22020
3BG22040
Description
CASSETTE,PAPER FEED
BASE,CASSETTE
CLUTCH,PAPER FEED
PULLEY,PAPER FEED
SHAFT,PAPER FEED
PULLEY B,PAPER FEED
COVER,CASSETTE
SPRING,CASSETTE
FRONT CLAW CASSETTE
BUSHING 6
COUPLER,RELEASE
PULLEY,CONVEYING
SPRING,PRESSING
BASE,PAPER FEED
GROUND PLATE,MACHINE
STOPPER,CASSETTE GROUND
SLIDER,CASSETTE
COVER,GROUND
PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER
LEFT GROUND PLATE,MACHINE
COVER,RELEASE
UPPER REAR COVER
REAR COVER,LID
HOOK,RELEASE
LABEL,CASSETTE SIZE
GUIDE,PAPER FEED
ROLLER,FEED
HOUSING,PAPER FEED
ACTUATOR,FEED
COVER,ACTUATOR
SPRING,ACTUATOR
MOUNT,DRIVE
GEAR 25/59
SHAFT,CLUTCH
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SP
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Part. No.
3BG27010
3BG27030
34806140
34806150
34906150
34907021
34907031
34907050
34907060
34907070
34907131
34907141
34907290
34907330
34918090
35327400
35927420
36093040
66260030
67322230
68802070
72114120
74318270
76508130
M2104260
M2105720
M2107120
Description
WIRE,CASSETTE
MOTOR,CASSETTE
STOPPER 4
STOPPER 5
REAR CLAW,CASSETTE
PIN,CLAW CASSETTE
REAR STOPPER,PAPER
GEAR 18,CASSETTE
PULLEY,GUIDE
GEAR 19,DISPOSAL
SWITCH,FEED
SWITCH,SIZE
PARTS MOTOR DRIVE PCB(SP)
BASE RUBBER,SORTER
BUSHING 8
SPRING A,LIFT UP
GEAR 19,DEVELOPER UNIT
SPRING,TONER DISPOSAL
EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA)
BINDING BAND SG-130
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fig. No.
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
Printing System (M)
CONTENTS
FIG.1 PRINTING SYSTEM
FIG. 1 PRINTING SYSTEM
3BM
1
6
3
4
7
FIG. 1 PRINTING SYSTEM

SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3BM01010
3BM68010
3BM28010
2AV26240
3BH26030
3BK26010
3BK26020
3BK26030
3BM
Description
PRINTER CONTROL PCB ASSY

CODE ROM SERVICE PCB
PRINTER CONTROL PCB
READ LID,SHIELD
PIN,OPTION
MOUNT,PRINTER BOARD
GUIDE,CF
RAIL,OPTION
Quantity
120V 230V 240V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SP
Ref.
No.
Part. No.
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Quantity
120V 230V 240V
330/331
CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION
REF. ITEM #
DESCRIPTION
REF. ITEM #
DESCRIPTION
BBB
BBK
B1303050
B1303060
BINDING SCREW BVM3X5 (BLACK)

BINDING SCREW BVM3X6 (BLACK)
HAT
HAU
B4144080
B4043080
+TP TAP-TITE P SCREW(CHROMIUM)

TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08
BEA
BHI
B1603050
B3313080
BINDING SCREW M3X5 (BRASS,NI)

BINDING TAP-TITE SCREW M3X08
HBH
HBI
B4303060
B4303080
TRIPLE SCREW M3X6 (BLACK)

TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK)
BIA
BIB
B8024350
B3310100
BINDING TAP-TIGHT B SCREW M4X35

+BINDING TAP-TIGHT P BRONZE SCREW M2.3X10
HCB
HCJ
B4103050
B4104100
TRIPLE SCREW M3X05(CHROMIUM)

BMF
BVV
B1003140
B1324080
BINDING SCREW CVM3X14

BINDING SCREW WITH SW (BLACK) M4X8
HCL
HDB
B4103060
B4343080

TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08(BLACK)
CIB B8073080
DJW B5393030
FLAT HEAD TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

W-POINT SET SCREW M3X3
HDC B4344080
HDG B4343100

E03
E05
D1000300
D1000500
STOP RING (E-3)

STOP RING (E-5)
KAK
KAL
E0020080
E0020100
SPRING PIN 2X8

SPRING PIN 2X10
E07
GEA
D1000700
B9604080
STOP RING (E-7)

GROUNDING SCREW M4X8 (BRASS,N;)
KAM E0020120
KKG E0030160
SPRING PIN 2X12

SPRING PIN 3X16
HAD B4003050
HAO B4043080
TRIPLE SCREW M3X05

NBA C1303000
WAD C2005120
NUT M3 (BLACK)
PLAIN WASHER PWM5
HAQ B4043100
KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.

Headquarters:
Western Region:

TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-6000
14101 Alton Parkway,

P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,
California 92618-7006
TEL : (949) 457-9000
FAX : (949) 457-9119
New York Show Room:

149 West 51st street,
New York, NY 10019
TEL : (212) 554-2679
FAX : (212) 554-2625
Northeastern Region:
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-4401
Midwestern Region:
201 Hansen Court Suite 119
Wood Dale, Illinois 60191
TEL : (630) 238-9982
FAX : (630) 238-9487
Southeastern Region:
1500 Oakbrook Drive,
Norcross, Georgia 30093
TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (770) 729-9873
Southwestern Region:
TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (972) 570-4704
Dallas Parts Distribution Center

& National Training Center:
TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.

6120 Kestrel Road,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.

Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Ins,
Delegacin Azcapotzalco
Mxico, D.F. C.P. 02130
TEL : 3-83-27-41
FAX : 3-83-78-04
2000 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation
is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
Printed in U.S.A.

KM-1510, KM-1810 Parts, Service Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

KM-1510, KM-1810 Parts, Service Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

KM-1510/1810

Safety warnings and precautions

2. Precautions for Maintenance

Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

1-1-2 Parts names

1 Start key (Indicator)

Paper Select key

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section

Paper feed section

1-1-4 Drive system

Drive motor gear

As viewed from machine rear

Scanner motor gear

Drive change gear 25*

*: For the 15 cpm copier only.

Original feed motor gear

(4) Drive system 4 (ST feed motor (optional) drive train)

As viewed from machine rear

ST feed motor gear

1-2-2 Developer and toner

1-2-3 Installation environment

Figure 1-2-1a Installation dimensions

Figure 1-2-1b Installation dimensions

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

Remove the tapes.

Adjust the fixing pressure.

Remove the tapes, pads and sheet inside the drawer.

Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.

Remove the pad inside the machine.

Install a toner container.

Install a waste toner tank.

Attach the original holder (15 cpm copier).

Connect the power cord.

Make test copies.

Completion of the machine installation.

Figure 1-3-1 Unpacking

Figure 1-3-2 Unpacking

2. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying cover

7. Open the front cover and store the removed pins

Waste toner tank

Drawer bottom plate

17. Holding the width adjustment lever, move it to

Completion of machine installation.

1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

1-3-3 Copier management

Executing a default setting item

Press both of the copy exposure

Select an setting item

Press the enter key.

Execute the default setting item

Auto exposure adjustment

Text and photo original exposure adjustment

Automatic drawer switching

Drawer paper size